JP7121078B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine that executes effects.

Conventionally, various techniques have been employed to control effects associated with games (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Further, Patent Document 2 describes a structure in which a decorative member protruding forward from the upper edge of the game board is covered with a transparent storage section provided on the front door. .

JP 2013-99585 A JP 2009-028351 A

However, in order to ensure control within limited resources, further improvements are required in control techniques. Moreover, in recent years, there is a demand for a game machine that can ensure the visibility of a game ball even if a large design portion is arranged while executing efficient light emission control.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of ensuring the visibility of a game ball even when a large design portion is arranged while executing efficient light emission control characterized by a control method. and

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the problems described above. It should be noted that the following expressions in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Further, the present invention can be an invention that includes at least one of the invention-specifying matters shown in the following means for solving the problem. Furthermore, each of the matters specifying the invention shown in the following solutions can be converted into a higher-level concept by adding elements that limit the matters specifying the invention, or can be made into a higher-level concept by deleting elements that limit the matters specifying the invention. .

Solution 1: The game machine of the present solution means includes specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect, predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in response to occurrence of a predetermined condition, and during execution of the specific effect and an effect control means capable of suppressing the effect operation of the predetermined effect.

According to the game machine of this solving means, the following features are obtained.
(1) For example, a specific effect can be executed during a game. The specific effect can be, for example, an effect that continues for a certain amount of time and is executed systematically.
(2) On the other hand, for example, during a game, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to occurrence of a predetermined condition. The predetermined effect is executed when a predetermined condition occurs, and can be an effect that occurs suddenly.
(3) The effect control means can suppress the effect operation of the predetermined effect (using a control flag) during execution of the specific effect. For example, even if a predetermined condition occurs during execution of a specific effect, it is possible to suppress the effect operation of the predetermined effect by managing flags for control. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the predetermined performance due to the occurrence of a sudden condition during the execution of the specific performance planned to some extent, and to maintain the interest of the specific performance.

Solution 2: In the gaming machine of the present solution means, in the above-described solution means, the effect control means turns on a specific effect execution flag based on the start of the specific effect to perform the effect operation of the predetermined effect. This game machine is characterized by being able to be suppressed.

According to this solving means, the specific effect in-execution flag is turned on at the start of the specific effect, and thereafter, when the flag is on, the effect operation of the predetermined effect is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the effect operation of the predetermined effect by managing the flag as soon as the specific effect is started. In addition, the fact that the specific effect execution flag is ON does not simply mean that "the specific effect is being executed", but also the judgment that "the operation of the predetermined effect must be suppressed". It will be used. As a result, the control method can be made more reliable.

Solution 3: In the gaming machine of the present solution means, in the above-described solution means, the effect control means turns off a specific effect execution flag based on the end of the specific effect, so that the effect operation of the predetermined effect is performed. This game machine is characterized in that suppression can be terminated.

According to this solving means, when the specific performance is completed, the flag during execution of the specific performance is turned off, and thereafter, when the flag is turned off, the performance operation of the predetermined performance is not suppressed. Therefore, although the performance operation of the predetermined performance was suppressed by the flag management during the execution of the specific performance, the suppression is terminated when the specific performance ends, and the predetermined performance can be executed quickly. In addition, the fact that the specific effect execution flag is off not only indicates that the specific effect has ended, but is also used to determine that the operation of the predetermined effect does not need to be suppressed. become a thing. As a result, the control method can be made more reliable.

Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present solution is further provided with symbol display means capable of executing variable display and stop display of symbols in the above solution means, and the specific effect execution means performs the above-mentioned The gaming machine is characterized in that a specific effect can be executed, and the predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect during non-variable display of symbols.

According to this solving means, neither the specific effect nor the predetermined effect appears during the variable display of the symbols, and the specific effect and the predetermined effect can be executed except during the variable display of the symbols. For example, during the variable display of the symbols, another effect such as a symbol effect is being executed, and the specific effect and the predetermined effect are not executed in parallel with the symbol effect. This is because, during the variable display of symbols, interest is maintained by design effects and the like, and no further specific effects or predetermined effects are executed. On the other hand, during the non-variable display of the symbols, the interest is not maintained by the symbol performance, so instead the interest is maintained by the specific performance or the predetermined performance. However, during execution of the specific effect, it is possible to appropriately maintain interest centered on the specific effect by suppressing the effect operation of the predetermined effect.

Solution F2: The game machine of this solution includes a front frame with a design part formed on the top, a game board with a game area having a left-handed area and a right-handed area, and arranged above the game area. a guide passage that has an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface and guides the game ball to the right-handed area; , execution or non-execution of a specific effect), by turning on or off a predetermined flag (for example, a flag indicating that a specific effect is being executed), an effect that can suppress the effect operation of the predetermined effect and a control means, wherein among lines extending in a direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board, a line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is set as a first reference line, and a vertical line with respect to the first reference line intersects. Among them, the rearmost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is the first design portion, and among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line intersect, the lowermost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is the second design. , the first design portion is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, and the second design portion is The game machine is positioned below the first reference line, and is located at a distance from the first reference line equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine of the present solving means, in addition to the novel features of the above solving means, the second design portion is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance from the first reference line is the game ball. , the design portion can be enlarged. In addition, while increasing the size of the design part in this way, by making the distance between the first reference line and the first design part equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball is hit strongly (the upper surface of the game ball passage When the game ball rolls along), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
Further, according to this means for solving the problem, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball even if a large-sized design portion is arranged while performing efficient light emission control.
It should be noted that the features of the above-described solutions 1 to 4 can be added to this solution.
Then, according to each of the above-described solving means, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of ensuring the visibility of game balls even when a large design portion is arranged while executing efficient light emission control characterized by a control method. can provide.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning device 31. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning device 31. FIG. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 11 is a flowchart (1/2) showing an example of a procedure of reset start processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart (2/2) showing an example of a procedure of reset start processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a second procedure example of reset start processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of in-preparation processing; FIG. 7 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of a procedure of power failure occurrence check processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of interrupt management processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of switch input event processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 1st special design memory|storage update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 2nd special design memory|storage update process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect determination processing at the time of acquisition; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a special symbol game process. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of special design storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 1st special design big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 2nd special design big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 2nd special design small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a process during a special design stop display. It is a figure which shows the list of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortening state. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortening state. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortening state. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game from the time shortening state is the second special symbol. 6 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of display output management processing; It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable prize-winning apparatus management process. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a special winning opening opening pattern setting process; It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table classified by design at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of an opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a special prize opening opening-and-closing operation process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a second big winning opening opening/closing operation process; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of specific area opening/closing operation processing; 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of processing when passing through a specific area; It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table classified by design at the time of passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 1st big winning a prize opening-and-closing operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a special winning opening closing process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for termination processing; It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special design changes in normal mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the time shortening state; It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special design fluctuates in the drive mode of a non-time reduction state. FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols (1/2); It is a continuation diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of the big hit (1/3). It is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of the big hit (2/3). It is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of the big hit (3/3). It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of an effect during a big role executed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of an effect during a big role executed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of the drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of the drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of the drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the second special symbol is changed in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state (1/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the second special symbol is changed in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state (2/2). It is a continuation diagram which shows the example of the predetermined production|presentation which can generate|occur|produce during important role production|presentation (1/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of a predetermined effect that can occur during the big role effect (2/2). It is a continuation diagram showing an execution example of a specific effect (1/2). It is a continuation diagram showing an execution example of a specific effect (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of operation memory production|presentation management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design change pre-processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of processing when the variable winning device is activated. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation pattern determination processing during a big role. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of predetermined production|presentation execution management processing during a big role. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation control processing during a big role. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production|presentation execution process after passing through a specific area. 4 is a diagram for explaining the flow of commands stored in a command set area of a RAM 130; FIG. It is a front view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of other embodiment. It is a front view showing a game board unit of another embodiment alone. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 75; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outer rail; It is a figure which shows a game board, an outer rail, and a rail base. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball contacts an outer rail. It is a figure which shows an outer rail and a game board.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as "pachinko machine") 1. As shown in FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game on the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the benefits (profits) that the player enjoys as a result of the game are, for example, the game It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.

[Overall configuration of game machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 (left edge in FIG. 2) as viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, when the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side locks the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the lock. It disables the opening of 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface to allow the game balls to flow down.

The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. In the lower tray 6c, the game balls put out while the upper tray 6b is full are stored. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game balls borrowed by the player are sent from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls to the receiving tray unit 6 (upper tray 6b or lower tray). Dispensed onto a plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation unit 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit is displayed on this frequency display section. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, but may be a cash machine (a model not connected to a card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. Further, the player can drop and eject the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by sliding the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e leftward, for example. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the shooting control board set 174 and can shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmills. The structure of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the receiving tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference numeral).

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 are provided with glass frame top speakers 54 and 55, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2 . These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

In addition, in the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player presses or rotates the effect switching button 45 to switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), or to perform some effect (for example, during the fluctuation of the pattern or during the jackpot game). It is possible to generate a notice effect, a probability change promotion effect, a promotion effect during a big role, etc.).

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , In addition to various units such as the back cover unit 178, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, an earth wire (earth terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. Electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 7).

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main controller, and the performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main controller. The performance display monitor 140 is arranged in the main controller so as to be visible in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and has four 7-segment LEDs. Four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED consists of 7 segments that can display decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located on the lower right of the 7 segments. It is Performance display monitor 140 is visible through a transparent case covering main control board unit 170 .

The main controller is also provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing the RAM, that is, for initializing the RAM (RWM) provided in the main controller, and in this embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required to change or refer to the game setting of the pachinko machine 1 .

The RAM clear switch 304 is depressible through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 . Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state in which the key cylinder passes through the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

Note that the positions of the performance display monitor 140, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are merely examples, and they can be arranged at arbitrary positions. Alternatively, the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting key hole 306 may be provided outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (e.g. prize ball information, door opening information, pattern confirmation number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) representing the progress state, maintenance state, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

[Board composition]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part centering on the production unit 40. - 特許庁In addition, in the game area 8a, around the production unit 40, there are a middle starting winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. Among them, the middle start winning opening 26 is located in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. A starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top in the right portion (so-called right-handed region) of the game region 8a. It is

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20 in the process of flowing down, or enters (wins) the medium start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 25, or the opening operation. The variable start winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that a game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22.例文帳に追加A game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning hole 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility that a ball may land in the first variable prize winning device 30 or may land in the second variable prize winning device 31 during opening operation. A game ball that entered the middle start winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 25, variable starting winning apparatus 28, first variable winning apparatus 30, and second variable winning apparatus 31 It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate material, a transparent plate, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the variable starting prize winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a win mode), and accordingly the entry into the right starting prize opening 28b. Enables balls (usually motorized accessories). The variable start-up winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening/closing members 28a, and these opening/closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the right start winning hole 28b (a game ball is difficult to enter). There is no gap that can be made). On the other hand, when the variable starting prize winning device 28 operates, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the width of the opening is expanded left and right to open the right starting prize winning port 28b. During this time, the variable starting prize winning device 28 is in a state in which the game ball can enter, and can cause the ball to enter the right starting prize winning port 28b (variable starting prize winning means). In addition, at this time, the opening/closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. In addition, the arrangement of the obstructing nails installed in the game board unit 8 basically does not impede the downflow of the game balls toward the variable starting prize winning device 28 (the right starting winning port 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28b) at the time of opening operation, and the ball enters at random.

In addition, the variable start winning device 28 is a condition that is difficult to be satisfied in a non-time shortening state (predetermined game state), and a predetermined condition that is more likely to be satisfied in a time shortening state (advantageous game state) than in a non-time shortening state. When the operation condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the state is shifted to an easy-to-enter state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b than the difficult-to-enter state. The variable start winning device 28 short-opens (opens for 0.1 second) when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortening state, and stops and displays the normal symbols in the winning mode in the time shortening state. If so, long open (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win, or when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small win game). , to allow the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b (special electric accessory, special winning event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the figure, the opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the first big prize winning port 30b (the first big prize winning port 30b is closed). is. When the first variable prize winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall rightward with its lower edge portion as a hinge, thereby opening the first big prize winning port 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable prize winning device 30 is in a state in which game balls can flow in, and an event of a ball entering the first big prize winning port 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big winning hole 30b. The arrangement of the obstructing nails installed in the game board unit 8 is such that basically it does not extremely hinder the flow of the game balls toward the first variable prize winning device 30 (the first big prize winning port 30b when activated). However, the game ball does not always enter the first variable winning device 30 when activated, and the ball enters at random.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small win) to enable the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b ( Special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means). Incidentally, the second variable winning device 31 may operate when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has one opening/closing member 31a, for example. The above-mentioned first variable winning device 30 employs a device in which the opening/closing member 30a falls to the right (one-blade tulip type attacker). Adopts a type of device that slides inside the board (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player side. is difficult to enter (the second big winning hole 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the second big prize winning port 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which it is not difficult for game balls to flow in, and an event of a ball entering the second big winning hole 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a specific area 31x is provided. The specific area 31x is an area where it is difficult for game balls to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state, the specific region slide member 31c is This is an area through which a game ball can pass when it is drawn into the inside of the board surface. Details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Also, although not shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening/closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reduction section that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction part moderates the inclination of the opening/closing member 31a, and forms protrusions that protrude alternately at positions on the opening/closing member 31a through which the game ball passes so that the game ball advances in a zigzag pattern. It can be realized by As a result, many game balls can enter the second variable winning device 31 during the small winning game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not win a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. - 特許庁In addition, the middle start winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 25, variable starting winning opening 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), first variable winning opening 30 (first large winning opening 30b), second variable winning opening 31 ( All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that entered the second big winning hole 31b (specific area), are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

4 and 5 are diagrams showing the details of the second variable winning device 31. FIG.
The second variable winning device 31 has a second big winning opening 31b arranged below a sliding opening/closing member 31a. The inside of the second big prize winning opening 31b is inclined downward to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the downwardly extending passage, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls entering the second variable winning device 31 .

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes at the tip. One of the first passages 31d extends downward, and the other of the second passages 31e branches to the left.
A specific region slide member 31c is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific region 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The specific area slide member 31c operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the first time has elapsed and before the second time has elapsed since the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the specific area 31x is operated. To allow passage of game balls. The specific area slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a specific area solenoid (not shown), for example. For example, after the first time has passed, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the second time has passed, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 has been activated. After the passage of time.

When the specific area solenoid is in the OFF state, the specific area slide member 31c blocks the first passage 31d, making it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x. On the other hand, when the specific area solenoid is turned on, the specific area slide member 31c is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4A, the sliding opening/closing member 31a is drawn into the inside of the board surface, and the game ball enters the second big winning hole 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second big winning hole 31b. Here, it is the state immediately before the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85 .

As shown in FIG. 4B, the first game ball has reached the specific area slide member 31c. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. - 特許庁The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning hole 31b.

As shown in FIG. 4(C), at this time point, the specific area slide member 31c is not pulled inward (because it is not in operation), so the first game ball is the specific area slide. The direction of travel is changed to the left by the member 31c, and travels through the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in (D) in FIG. 5, it is assumed that the specific-area slide member 31c is drawn inside the board surface at this time (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5(E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in (F) in FIG. 5, at this point, the operation of the specific area slide member 31c is completed, and the specific area slide member 31c protrudes forward from the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the left by the specific area slide member 31c and proceeds to the second passage 31e. And the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 6 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
In the game board unit 8, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a are provided at the lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (second 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Among them, the normal design display device 33 alternately lights two lamps (LEDs), for example, to variably display the normal design, and stops displaying the normal design by lighting or extinguishing the lamp. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays the number of memories of 0 to 4 by a combination of extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of two lamps (LED), for example. For example, in the display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is lit, the stored number is displayed as 1, and in the display mode where the same one lamp is blinked. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is 3 in the display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is 4 in the display mode in which both lamps are blinking. For example, to display an individual. Although two lamps (LED) are used here, four lamps (LED) may be used to form the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

Each time a game ball passes through the starting gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in the sense of memorizing the passage that triggers the operation lottery. (up to 4), and with the passage as a trigger, the display mode changes to the display mode after the decrease by 1 each time the variation of the normal symbol is started. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to fluctuate (at the time of stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol variation has not yet started at that time.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the fluctuation state and the stop state of the special symbols by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first pattern display means, second pattern display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, circularly).

In addition, the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a displays the number of memories of 0 to 4 (memory number display means ). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a stored number is displayed as 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinking. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is displayed as 3 in a display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is displayed in a display mode in which both lamps are blinking. 4 are displayed, and so on.

On the other hand, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a displays one memory number (memory number display means) by a display mode composed of a combination of turning off or lighting one lamp (LED), for example. For example, when one lamp is turned off, the stored number is 0, and when one lamp is turned on, the stored number is 1.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, it is remembered that a ball has entered. (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the entry ball as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after the decrease by one. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, when a game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28b), changes to the display mode after the increase in the sense of memorizing that the ball has entered. It changes (up to one), and when the variation of the special symbol is started with the entrance ball as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after the decrease. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is already in a state where variation can be started (at the time of stop display). The display mode does not change even if a game ball enters the medium start winning hole 26.例文帳に追加In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start to change (at the time of stop display). Even if a game ball enters (the right starting winning hole 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the memory number (maximum 4 or maximum 1) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is still the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation is started at that time It represents the number of times the ball was not entered.

The gaming state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs respectively corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the firing position designation display lamp 38f. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are mounted on one integrated display board 89 and attached to the game board unit 8. - 特許庁

[Other configurations of the game board: see Fig. 3]
The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, built-in light emitters (LEDs, etc.). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the inner upper part of the production unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 has a production pattern (main pattern) corresponding to a special pattern, a fourth pattern, Various effect images including a memory marker (holding display) are displayed. Thus, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (the design of the cell board not shown) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40 .

Furthermore, a drum unit 200 is installed inside and below the production unit 40 .
The drum unit 200 has a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203, and each reel displays pseudo performance symbols (7 symbols, panda symbols, cherry symbols, etc.). For example, when 7 symbols of the same color are displayed on the middle line, which is the active line, it means that a big hit has been obtained in the special symbol lottery. Each reel of the drum unit 200 is a movable body movable at a plurality of movable speeds.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left side edge of the effect unit 40. As shown in FIG. The ball guide passage 40d passes through the back side of the production unit 40 and is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e easily flows into the medium start winning opening 26 directly below. .

In addition, inside the upper center of the production unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached together with a movable body 40f for production (for example, a heart-shaped ornament). The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. Such an effect using the movable body 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation, and this main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. there is The main controller 70 is incorporated in the main control board unit 170 described above.

In addition, the main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. RWM) 76 or the like is integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is also equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77 . Of these, the random number generator 75 is for generating a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for judging the jackpot of the special symbol lottery or the winning judgment of the normal symbol lottery. is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77 . In addition, the main controller 70 includes a RAM clear switch 304 used for initializing the RAM 76, an input/output (I/O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter/timer circuit (CTC) and other peripheral ICs. are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72 . A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or an inner layer portion).

Further, the main controller 70 is provided with a setting change device 300 and a setting key switch 302 . The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes settings by operating the setting change device 300. FIG. The setting change device 300 is a device for switching settings (at least settings relating to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and operates by operating the RAM clear switch 304 provided in the pachinko machine 1 or the like. Also, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Furthermore, the operating probability means the probability of displaying a combination of special symbols that will activate the conditional device (that will result in the execution of the jackpot game). The setting key switch 302 is an input device for inputting a signal (ON/OFF) indicating the rotation state of the setting key, which is essential for switching settings, as the setting key is rotated. Various methods can be adopted for changing the setting, and for example, the following procedure can be used.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with a special key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7. As shown in FIG.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306, and the setting is performed. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated rightward, the setting is changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state in which the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to one of a plurality of steps provided in advance. Also, the set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 140.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, lever ON processing is required. direction, turning on a setting change confirmation button (not shown), etc.), or the lever ON process may be omitted. In this embodiment, once the desired setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to its original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to its original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) When the setting change is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the setting key keyhole 306 . In addition, when the setting value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the gaming state display device 38, and the performance display monitor 140, the display disappears when the setting change is confirmed.
(9) Finally, the door of the pachinko machine 1 is closed. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, a normal game is started.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

In this case, the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed to change the setting to one of the stages. good too. In this case, in the above procedure (6), the separately provided setting change switch is pressed an arbitrary number of times.

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a medium start winning port 26, a variable starting winning device 28, a middle starting winning port switch 80 and a right starting winning port corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each starting winning prize port switch 80, 82 is for detecting winning of a game ball to the starting winning prize port 26 and the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28b). Also, the count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of game balls to the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening 30b) and counting the number. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of game balls to the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) and counting the number.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second big winning hole 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of game balls into the normal winning openings 22 and 25 . Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 25 is taken as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning opening on the left side A switch 86 detects winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22 and 25 positioned on the left side of the board, and a right winning port switch 86 detects winning of a game ball to the normal winning port 25 positioned on the right side of the board. may be

In any case, winning detection signals and passing detection signals of these switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, winning detection signals and passing detection signals from the gate switch 78, the specific area switch 83, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 are routed through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, etc. for relaying the winning detection signals.

The above-described normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87 .

A performance display monitor 140 is also connected to the main controller 70 via a panel relay terminal board 87 . The performance display monitor 140 displays the number of game balls that are put out when the game balls enter each winning hole (starting winning hole, normal winning hole, big winning hole). A monitor for displaying the base calculated by dividing by the number (the number of game balls detected by the out switch 141). The base is calculated for each section set in advance using a region (non-use region) different from the use region used for control to progress the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are calculated. , are displayed alternately at intervals set in advance. The display operation of the performance display monitor 140 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 140 according to the calculated state of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the seven segments.

Although the performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main controller 70 via the panel relay terminal board 87, it may be connected to the main controller 70 without the panel relay terminal board 87. , the performance display monitor 140 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main controller 70 .

In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31 and the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, a second big winning opening solenoid 97 and a specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 and 99 are operated (excited) based on control signals from the main control CPU 72, and the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30, the second variable prize winning device 31 and the specific area 31x, respectively. open and close the Control signals for these solenoids 88 , 90 , 97 and 99 are also transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87 .

In addition, a glass frame open switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4 and a plastic frame open switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7 . When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When detecting the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (special privilege providing means). This payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and this payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI integrated with a CPU core (not shown) and semiconductor memories such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) and a payout device board 100 are installed in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172. The payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. there is The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the indicated number of game balls from the prize ball case. let out The paid out game balls are sent to the receiving tray unit 6 through the payout channel in the channel unit 173 .

In addition, for example, a payout road ball disconnect switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102 . Each time the payout motor 102 is driven to actually pay out the prize balls, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100 . Also, when the ball runs out at the upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100 . The payout device board 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower tray 6c (at the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The actually paid out prize balls (game balls) are discharged to the upper tray 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper tray 6b is filled with game balls, more game balls are dispensed. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Furthermore, when the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is thereby turned on, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball motions even if a prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out in the RAM 98.例文帳に追加The memory in the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, so even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. .

Also, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. - 特許庁Also, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6 . The firing control board 108, the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the aforementioned firing control board set 174. Of these, the firing control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation to feed the game balls stored in the receiving tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined shooting position within the launcher case. Also, the shooting solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the shooting position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. In addition, the shooting interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls per minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114 and a firing stop switch . Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Also, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (firing handle) from a change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal therefor. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the player's operation.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the receiving tray unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted via the firing relay terminal plate 118 to the firing control board 108. sent to. A drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal plate 118 . When the player operates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength of hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. do. In addition, a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the shooting relay terminal plate 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to this game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120, similarly shooting The drive circuit on control board 108 stops driving firing solenoid 110 .

Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending/returning switch board 123 . Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the above-described frequency display unit indicator (three-digit seven-segment LED). In addition, the lending and returning switch board 123 is mounted with switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the returning button 12, respectively. And it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . In addition, from the card unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives a display based on the frequency signal to numerically display the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when no valuable medium is inserted into the card unit or when the remaining points of the inserted valuable medium become 0, the display circuit of the point display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium ) can also be displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a performance control device 124 (computer for controlling performance) as a control configuration. This performance control device 124 controls the performance accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 . The performance control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which a performance control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The production control CPU 126 incorporates a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 and an eDRAM 131 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). Note that the effect control device 124 is provided at a position on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and covered by the back cover unit 178 .

In addition, the production control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the production such as the VDP 152, the driver IC 132, the voice IC 134, and the like. Among them, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing a rendering screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . The driver IC 132 includes ICs for controlling devices such as the lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, the movable body motor 57, and the like. Also, the audio IC 134 controls outputs from the speakers 54 , 55 and 56 . In addition, the internal configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described later in detail using another drawing.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via a communication harness (not shown), for example. However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. In addition, the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O) A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

In this embodiment, a sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and driving signals from the driver IC 132 and the audio IC 134 are transmitted via the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52, speakers 54, 55, 56. In addition to the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a, the sub-connection board 136 is connected to a volume adjustment switch (not shown). It is input to the production control device 124 through the board 136 . Here, an example in which each operation member is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given, but when the above-described receiver electrical board is installed, each operation member may be connected to the receiver electrical board.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8 , and the board surface lamp 53 , movable body motor 57 and movable body sensor 58 are connected to this driver board 138 . The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The movable body sensor 58 is, for example, a photosensor provided at the origin position (initial position) of the movable body 40f, and outputs a detection signal when the movable body 40f is detected. A drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the driver board 138 . Note that the movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

[drum unit]
A drum unit 200 is connected to the driver board 138 .
The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203 which are coaxially arranged.
The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 are each formed in an annular shape, and a reel belt with a plurality of pseudo performance symbols arranged in a row at intervals is wound around the reel. . The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 have a rotation axis at the center thereof, and can be rotated or reversely rotated around the rotation axis.

Further, the drum unit 200 is provided with a stepping motor (not shown) corresponding to each reel (hereinafter also simply referred to as a motor) and a position detection mechanism (not shown) corresponding to each reel. The position detection mechanism may be arranged inside the stepping motor or may be arranged outside the stepping motor. The position detection mechanism can be composed of, for example, a light shielding plate and a photosensor.

The stepping motor is driven by a drum unit controller (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls the drum unit 200 . The drum unit control device drives each reel according to movable body data transmitted from the effect control device 124 . Further, the drum unit control device transmits a detection signal to the effect control device 124 via the driver board 138 in response to detection of the position of each reel (for example, origin position) detected by the position detection mechanism.

Based on the detection signal transmitted from the drum unit control device, the effect control device 124 generates movable body data to be transmitted to the stepping motor corresponding to each reel, and controls the operation of each reel.

The stepping motor is a motor that alternately repeats 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation to drive each reel (movable body) (1-2 phase excitation drive). A coil 4) is included.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8 , and the display screen thereof can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8 . In addition, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates AC power applied to the backlight of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, a cold cathode tube).

In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7 . This power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit, and when it takes in external power (for example, AC 24V, etc.) from the island equipment through the power cord 164, it can generate necessary power (for example, DC +34V, +12V, etc.). The power generated by the power control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70 , the payout control device 92 , the performance control device 124 and the inverter board 158 . Further, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the card unit via the terminal board 120 for lending equipment such as game balls. Low-voltage power (for example, DC +5V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166 as described above.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. is output to the outside from The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72 ) and payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94 ) can output external information signals to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160 . Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are counted by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. In addition, although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 .

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124. As shown in FIG.
As described above, the performance control device 124 has a role as a performance control processor that controls the performance as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the performance control CPU 126, the performance control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188 which are necessary for the performance control device 124 to function as a performance control processor. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs, tables, and the like relating to the control of effects. The effect control CPU 126 accesses the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and controls the effect by executing a program stored in the control ROM 180 . Watch dog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the assumed time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU126. there is When the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC 188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC 188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting the effect control CPU 126. do. As a result, the production control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the performance control device 124 has functions related to performance, such as an SRAM 182 that is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , a lithium battery 186 for supplying backup power to the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184, and peripheral ICs such as an input/output driver and a counter/timer circuit (not shown). The lithium battery 186 stores this power and charges itself while driving power is supplied from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 . The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to a lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the drive power supply from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate until the lithium battery 186 runs out of charge (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even under power-off conditions.

In addition, the effect control program is configured to store in the SRAM 182 information regarding security, monitoring, trouble, etc., which should not be easily erased. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the performance control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is recovered (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with investigation of the cause of the trouble. becomes possible.

By the way, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect executed according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, and finally, the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, speakers 54, 55, 56 and other devices operate. is controlled. Broadly speaking, the flow of this effect control can be divided into two stages of "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives the effect command transmitted from the main controller 70 and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect corresponding to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the production control CPU 126 generates instruction data by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 relays between the production control CPU 126 and each device. to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and effect reproduction (screen display, sound output, lamp emission, movable body operation) using each device in the pachinko machine 1 etc.) are realized.

In this way, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of effect control, and these functions are realized as a plurality of tasks that use the resources of the effect control CPU 126 properly. In FIG. 8, the tasks corresponding to the individual functions executed by the production control CPU 126 are the production control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the audio control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, the input control unit 228, Time Control Unit (ACT) 230, and so on. In the following description, each task is treated as an action subject of effect control processing.

First, in the overall control stage, the production control section 210 in the production control CPU 126 is the main operating body, and controls the flow of the entire production using a time management section (ACT) 230 that manages the time progress of the production. In addition, at the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the sound control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 is the main operating body according to the device to be controlled. becomes. In addition, it is good also as a structure which the production|presentation control part 210 controls each control device 134,152,198,199 grade|etc., directly.

The performance control device 124 functions as a performance control processor in the stage of overall control, and functions as a performance reproduction processor in the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a CGROM (image/audio ROM) 190, a VDP 152 (effect display control board) for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, an audio IC 134, an LED driver 198, an SMC A (serial control controller) 199 and a driver IC 132 are provided.

The CGROM 190 stores drawing materials (moving image data) that make up the effect screen and audio materials (audio data) that are output along with the progress of the effect in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the audio IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing effect images, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 into one chip. Also, the VDP 152 incorporates a VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157 . Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used for decompressing the drawing material, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used for decompressing (decoding) the compressed drawing material. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220 , reads necessary drawing materials from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers them to the VRAM 156 . Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is developed in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data, the effect screen is reproduced.

The sound IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sounds such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during execution of the production, and is integrated with the production control CPU 126 into one chip, similar to the VDP 152 . The audio IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, and a CG bus. The audio IC 134 also incorporates an audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) compressed audio materials. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content sent from the voice control unit 222, and reads necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read voice material is decoded using the voice material decoder 135 on the external DRAM. Stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch audio reproduction (a larger number of channels may be used) is realized by outputting the decoded audio to various speakers via an amplifier. Also, the audio IC 134 adjusts the output volume of various speakers based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls lighting patterns and brightness patterns associated with the performance of various lamps provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 . The LED driver 198 employs an addressing synchronous serial scheme. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the contents of the instruction sent from the lamp control section 224 , and transfers drive data according to this to the driver IC 132 .

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the motor that serves as the drive source for various movable bodies for effects provided inside the effect unit 40, and relays the detection signal output by the sensor for the movable bodies to control the movable bodies. It is handed over to the section 226 . The SMC 199 is also integrated with the effect control CPU 126 into one chip. The SMC 199 employs a clock synchronous serial method. When driving the movable body, the SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern for the motor for the movable body based on the instruction content transmitted from the movable body control section 226 and transfers it to the driver IC 132 . Here, the SMC 199 is used only for generating motor drive patterns, but since the SMC 199 can generate not only motor driving patterns but also lamp lighting patterns and luminance patterns, the SMC 199 is used instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible for the SMC 199 to generate both lamp and motor data patterns.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamps and motors based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 and SMC 199 . The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and controls the operation by switching (or duty switching) the drive voltage applied to various lamps and movable body motors. By doing so, effect reproduction using lamps and movable bodies is realized. In addition to the glass-frame top lamp 46 and the glass-frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52, the various lamps include light sources built into each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration/production lamps installed in the game board unit 8. board lamp 53 is included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built into the effect unit 40, or an LED built into the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like.

In addition, the driver IC 132 transfers contact signals that are input when operation members such as the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45 a are operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228 . The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the content of the effect to be reproduced based on the content of the contact signal transferred.

The above is an example of the configuration relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1 . Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main controller 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts reset start processing. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power shutdown, or by clearing the backup information. This process is for Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable game operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

9 and 10 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of reset start processing. Each procedure of the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described below.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector type interrupt mode (mode 2) and modifies the default RST type interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, the main control CPU 72 can thereafter refer to any address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the specified interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process secures a certain amount of waiting time (for example, about several thousand milliseconds) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checks the main power interruption detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power interruption detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power failure detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitor IC, which is a peripheral device. When the input of the main power interruption detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to protect the system even if the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly turned on and off within a short period of time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU72 permits access to the work area of the RAM76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 initializes the mask register to set the interrupt mask. Specifically, a value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the previously saved input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switched ON). If the RAM clear switch has not been operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup was successfully completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU72 performs a sum check on the backup information in the RAM76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (user work area including use-prohibited area and stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the sum check result is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, "0000H").
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command that was waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurred.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes effect control return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the effect control device 124 a return command (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state designation command, effect command when the number of working memories is increased, effect command when the number of working memories is decreased, number of cuts counter command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 changes the effect state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, internal probability state, display mode of the effect pattern, effect display mode of the working memory number, sound output content, various lamps light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, the display mode of special symbols, the internal probability state, working memory contents, various flag states, random number update state, etc.). Also, the main control CPU 72 restores the value of the PC register that was backed up.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), if the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or if the backup information is not normal (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the storage contents of the RAM 76 other than the prohibited area. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents thereof are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU72 also initializes the RAM76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 outputs a command (a command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes payout control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command to the payout control device 92 to start paying out prize balls.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing to initialize the CTC (counter/timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and also sets an interrupt count value (eg 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when the next CTC interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the program address of the backed-up PC register.

After executing the above procedure in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 10 (connection symbol A→A).

Steps S118 and S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interrupts, and then executes power failure check processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power interruption detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power interruption (drop in drive voltage). When a power cutoff occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the big winning opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire work area of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. and store the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, "A55AH") in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops processing (NOP). On the other hand, if power shutdown does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. It should be noted that there is a well-known example of programming that causes the CPU to execute such processing when power failure occurs as non-maskable interrupt (NMI) processing.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot design random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) except for the jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and the hit determination random numbers corresponding to normal symbols (hardware random numbers) is generated programmatically. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 14). random number does not have to be the target) is changed. The initial value update random number is used to randomly change this initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why step S120 is executed after prohibiting interrupts in step S118 is that the same processing is executed in another interrupt management processing (step S202 in FIG. 14). ) is to prevent As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update period thereof is faster than the timer interrupt period (eg, several ms). (for example, several μs), there is no need to update the initial values of the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number.

Steps S121, S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interrupts and executes random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to determination of winning types (hit types) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 14). The content of the interrupt management process will be described later.

FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second procedure example of the reset start process. It should be noted that redundant description of processing similar to the first procedure example of the reset start processing will be omitted. Also, the processing in FIG. 10 is the same between the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

The second procedure example of the reset start process differs from the first procedure example of the reset start process in that a process during preparation (step S112a) is added.

Specifically, when it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S106, when it is determined to be negative (No) in step S107, or when it is determined to be negative (No) in step S108, the preparation process (Step S112a) is executed.
Note that the execution timing of the in-preparation process (step S112a) is not limited to such timing, and can be executed at any timing during the reset start process. In other words, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch depressed, the control should be such that the transition from "preparing" to "playable state (state shifted to main loop)" is performed.

Step S112a: In the in-preparation process, the main control CPU 72 controls various operations required when clearing the RAM. Details of the processing will be described later.
Then, when the in-preparation process (step S112a) ends, the main control CPU 72 executes the RAM clear process (step S113). The subsequent processing is the same as the processing of the first procedure example.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing during preparation.
Step S125: The main control CPU 72 executes an operation control process during preparation. Details of the in-preparation operation control process will be described later.

Step S126: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switched ON).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch has been operated (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the reset start process (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch has been operated (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S125.
By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can continue to execute the operation control processing during preparation in step S126 until the RAM clear switch is pressed.

[Operation control processing during preparation]
The details of the operation contents of the in-preparation operation control process are as follows.
The main control CPU 72 can execute a process that employs at least one of the following states and operations in the in-preparation operation control process.

(1) "Preparing" is a state that is shifted to when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed. During preparation, it stays until the RAM clear switch is pressed again. When the RAM clear switch is pressed in the "preparing" state, the state shifts to the "playable state".

(2) During preparation, the movable body (the movable body connected to the main controller 70) managed by the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) is controlled to move, and whether or not the movable body operates normally is controlled. You can check the movement.
Specifically, a special electric accessory (attacker), a movable body inside a special electric accessory (a movable body that opens a variable area or a specific area, a rotating body that always rotates in the case of two types, a specified trigger Movable bodies that can be moved by , mechanisms, solenoids, motors, etc. associated with them), and normal electric accessories (electric tulips) are movably controlled by a constant operation.
The movement control is executed by operating a solenoid or a motor according to a movement pattern in which, for example, "0.4 seconds ON→0.4 seconds OFF" is repeated multiple times.
The movable control may be executed continuously from the beginning to the end during preparation, or may be executed with a predetermined number of times or a predetermined time as an upper limit.

(3) During preparation, it is possible to make it clearly visible from the outside. In this case, for example, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display, information such as "preparing", "cannot play", "press RAM clear switch to end", "press effect button to change effect setting", etc. can be displayed. can. In this case, an audio output such as "Being prepared" may be repeated.

(4) During the preparation, it may be possible to change the setting regarding the effect by operating the effect button. For example, when you press the production switch button (production button), the display screen of the liquid crystal display switches, and you can select the date and time setting, volume setting (1 to 5 stages), production frequency setting (1 to 3 stages), production type setting, etc. can be made possible.

(5) During the preparation, the shooting control of game balls may be disabled. This is because game balls can be shot from the shooting control board 108 on the condition that a "shooting permission signal" is transmitted from the main controller 70 to the payout controller 92 . The main controller 70 can perform processing for transmitting the "fire enable signal" within the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)", but during preparation, the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)" Since it is a period that has not been executed yet, it will be in a state where it cannot be fired.

(6) The program for processing during preparation (program for operating various movable bodies) can be mounted (arranged) within the use area. The usable area is an area in which the gaming machine rules define the capacity that can be used to control the progress of the game, and the area outside the area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the usable capacity.

(7) During the period of preparation, external information indicating that preparation is in progress may be output to an external electronic device (eg, data display device, hall computer, etc.).

(8) During preparation is the stage before shifting to the main loop (before interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) is executed). Therefore, during preparation, the display (main segment) of the integrated display board 89 can be turned off. Also, during the preparation, it is possible not to determine errors that can be determined during the game ready state (for example, magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening fraudulent winning error, etc.). Furthermore, during the preparation, it is possible not to execute payout of prize balls, variation of special symbols, and variation of normal symbols.

(9) When the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch depressed, a command indicating "preparing" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. Also, when the RAM clear switch is pressed again and the preparation is completed, a command indicating "end of preparation" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. In this case, the command may be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device before proceeding to the main loop.
At the stage of preparation, RAM clear processing is not executed, and RAM clear processing can be executed on condition that the RAM clear switch is pressed during preparation. However, after the RAM clear processing is executed, the processing may be shifted to the preparation state, and then the processing may be shifted to the main loop.

As a background of adopting such a configuration, there are the following problems.
In conventional game machines, the operation of special electric accessories and normal electric accessories cannot be checked at any time (especially when the power is turned on when clearing the RAM), so problems suddenly occur during normal games. It may occur.

By adopting the configuration as described above, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) When the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not various electric accessories are operable, so that the problem of the various electric accessories not operating during the game can be prevented, and the game can be played normally.
(2) Since the game can be played normally, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.
(3) Problems can be resolved in advance (before the game is played), so the process of confirming problems during the game can be eliminated, which contributes to reducing the processing load on control.
(4) Since the effect setting can be executed during preparation (during operation confirmation), an efficient game can be provided.

The following technical content can be extracted from the above configuration.
(1) When the power is turned on while a predetermined operation member (RAM clear switch), a movable body (electric accessory, drive source, solenoid, motor, etc.) and the predetermined operation member are being operated, The game machine is provided with movable body operating means for operating the movable body in a fixed motion pattern in order to confirm whether the movable body operates normally.
(2) In the configuration of (1) above, it is preferable that the movable body operating means continues to operate the movable body in a constant motion pattern until a predetermined operation member is operated again.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 13 is a flow chart specifically showing a procedure example of the above-described power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets the conditions for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power interruption detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power interruption detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power interruption detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, a main power disconnection detection switch is mounted, for example, in the main controller 70. This main power disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output. Note that the main power disconnection detection switch may be incorporated in the power control unit 162 . When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power interruption detection signal is not output at this time (No), it exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the main power disconnection detection signal has been output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether the result is 0 or not. If the on-counter value is still not 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and checks the main power interruption detection switch input port again. Then, when the loop from step S134 to step S132 is repeated and the check condition is satisfied (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big winning opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Steps S138, S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76, excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer, in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When sum calculation is completed for all areas (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the validity value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: In addition, the main control CPU 72 stores "01H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibited area and stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for the shutdown of the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70). held without. The backup power supply circuit may be built in the power control unit 162, for example.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (to be added to the sum) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. In addition, the stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 9).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several milliseconds) based on an interrupt request signal from the counter/timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU72 saves the values of the registers (each pair of the accumulator A and the flag register F, and the general-purpose registers B to L) used during the execution of the main loop to the saving area of the RAM76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after saving the values during the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes lottery random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and looped within a prescribed range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process here. The contents of the processing are the same as those described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input/output (I/O) port 79 . Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, the specific area switch 83 Reads the input state (ON/OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the specific area switch 83 Based on the passage detection signal from, an event that occurred during the game is determined, and further processing is executed according to the event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using another flowchart.

In this embodiment, when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol respectively (lottery opportunity, first lottery opportunity, second lottery opportunity). Also, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When determining that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each occurrence event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S205, step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1 . Among these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second It controls the variable display and stop display by the 2 special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later using another flowchart.

In addition, in the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. to control. For example, the main control CPU72 stores the random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired with the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event process (step S204), and in this normal symbol game process A random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (normal symbol lottery executing means). When the random number falls within the winning range, the normal symbols are variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner. It is excited to operate the variable starting prize winning device 28 (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs stop display of normal symbols in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signal input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92. Output command.

[Regarding the number of prize balls and the number of winning game balls]
The number of prize balls for the start opening of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls for the start opening of the second special symbol are each set to a prescribed number of one or more. Also, the number of winning balls may be different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. In addition, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of special symbols and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may Furthermore, the probability of winning a special pattern, the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired, the number of times the large winning opening is opened, the opening time of the large winning opening, the maximum number of winnings of the large winning opening, and the number of winning balls of the large winning opening are specified. When the conditions are satisfied, a big win may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one big win is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (e.g. winning ball information, door opening information, pattern determination number information, jackpot information, start opening) to the hall computer (external device) of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. information, etc.) in the port output request buffer.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5" are output as jackpot information to the outside, so that an external electronic device (data display (external information signal output means). That is, by dividing the jackpot information into a plurality of "jackpots 1" to "jackpots 5" and outputting them, the types of jackpots (types of winnings) can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations. Occurrence of small hits that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the shortened state of symbol fluctuation time (hit that does not operate the conditional device) even if it is not winning. can be aggregated and managed. Also, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently jackpotting. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize whether or not the current symbol variation time is shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the respective output states (set of ON or OFF) of "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5".

Step S209: The main control CPU 72 also executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70, for example.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 includes the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. It controls lighting states of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or normal symbol game process (step S206) is port-output. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a stop display, a working memory number display, a game state display, etc.).

Step S211: The main control CPU 72 also executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 outputs drive signals and test signals for the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. etc. are combined and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 in the command buffer to check whether there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command necessary for effect control), if there is an unsent command command to be output port output.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in this CTC interrupt.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing of steps S205 to S212 (game control program module) is executed as a timer interrupt processing, but these processing are executed by incorporating them into the main loop of the CPU. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) designating the end of the interrupt in the interrupt program counter and ends the CTC interrupt.

Steps S215, S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the values of the saved registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (the program address indicated by the stack pointer). In the interrupt management process, the main control CPU 72 judges various errors (magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.) based on sensors and switches (not shown) that detect various errors. can do.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 14). Each procedure will be described below.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the right start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here, similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning port 30b of the first variable winning device 30 or not. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 and executes the first big winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big winning game. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning port 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 and executes the second big winning opening counting process. In the second big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big winning game (during the small winning game). On the other hand, if the winning detection signal has not been input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of this passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, if the passage detection signal has not been input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes normal symbol memory update processing. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, acquires a random number per normal symbol. do. Also, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol working memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the obtained random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passing detection signal has been input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second big winning opening 31b. When the input of this passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes processing to turn ON the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, if there is no passage detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 14).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory updating process (step S12 in FIG. 15). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into five sections (for example, 2 bytes each) used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. can be stored as a set (set) one by one. However, only four sections can be used for the first special symbol, and only one section can be used for the second special symbol. Therefore, even if there is an empty section, if four sections have already been used for the first special symbol, each random number for the first special symbol is no longer stored. Similarly, even if there is a vacant section, if one section is already used for the second special symbol, each random number of the second special symbol is no longer stored. The reason why there are five sections is that the number of sections required is the sum of the maximum number of memory of the first special symbol (4) and the maximum number of memory of the second special symbol (1). At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU72 adds one to the first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol working memory number counter is stored, for example, in the working memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 14).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a big hit determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). A random number is obtained by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75 . When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed in two batches of 1 byte each for the upper and lower bytes. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number from the specified address, it saves it as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot design random number from the designated address, it saves it as the jackpot design random number corresponding to the first special design at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 as the random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is similarly performed by designating the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the specified address, it saves them to the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used for the first and second special symbols, These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section within the area (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, 1st to 5th) is set for a plurality of sections, and if all the 1st to 5th sections are empty at the present stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fifth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. Note that reading from the random number storage area is in FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. If it is other than during a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the performance based on the prediction is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: In the case other than during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). This process is based on the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the jackpot pattern random number, and the variation pattern determination random number obtained in the previous steps S32 to S34, the result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time in advance (before the start of variation). It is for determining the content of the effect (so-called "prefetching"). In this process, the result of the prior determination of the first special symbol is set to the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command (prefetch information).

Step S38: After executing the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B8H") of the special figure destination determination effect command with respect to the first special symbol (prefetching process executing means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination production for the first special symbol". In addition, since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination judgment effect command (information on success or failure and information on fluctuation time) is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S37), here the upper byte is combined with the lower byte By doing so, for example, a 1-word long command is generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, a one-word-length command is obtained by adding the increased number of working memories (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command. Generate production commands. At this time, the second digit of the low-order byte is set to "0" by default to indicate that the value is "a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". In other words, if the lower byte is "01H", it indicates that the current working memory number is "01H" as a result of incrementing by one from the previous working memory number "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is ``02H'' to ``04H'', it means that the number of working memories ``01H'' to ``03H'' up to the previous time has increased by 1, resulting in the number of working memories ``02H'' to ``02H'' to `` 04H”. In addition, the preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the starting entrance winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( memory number notification means).

If the above procedure is completed, or if the number of first special symbol working memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 15).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory updating process (step S16 in FIG. 15). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter and checks whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol working memory number counter also indicates the number (number of sets) of the jackpot decision random numbers and jackpot pattern random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 1) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

Step S41: The main control CPU72 adds one to the second special symbol working memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 16), based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 14). will be

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of obtaining the random value is the same as in step S32 (FIG. 16) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of obtaining the random number value is the same as in step S33 (FIG. 16) described above.

Step S44: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 16) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A set of random numbers is stored in an empty section in the area (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as that of step S35 (FIG. 16) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. Then, if it is other than during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that, likewise, an effect based on prediction is not performed for a ball entering during a big hit.

Step S46: If it is not during the big hit (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the second special symbol jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect contents are determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set to the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command.

Step S47: After executing the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B9H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (prefetching process executing means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination performance regarding the second special symbol". Here as well, the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S46). command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length effect command is obtained by adding the increased working memory number (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. to generate Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the low-order byte to "0" by default, it is possible to express that the value is "the result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". can. It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process regarding the second special symbol. As a result, a special figure destination determination production command, a working memory number increase production command, a start opening winning sound control command, etc. are transmitted to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means) with respect to the second special symbol. Also, after completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 15).

[Production determination process when acquired]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU72 executes this acquisition time effect determination process in the previous first special symbol memory update process and second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 16, step S46 in FIG. 17) (preliminary determination means, prefetch processing execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the medium start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the processing related to the first special symbol or the processing related to the second special symbol. The contents of the processing will be described below along each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). Note that the byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of failure).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the big hit determination random number as the first judgment random number. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 16) or second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 17). .

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (here, below the lower limit value) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit) in the A register and subtracts the loaded random number from this comparison value. Incidentally, the comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1 . Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the calculation result is 0 or a positive value, for example, from the value of the flag register. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern first determination means, pre-reading process execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern first determination command (prefetch information) for the variation time at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior judgment information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) especially at the time of operation of the "time reduction function". For example, if the current state is the time of operation of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "loss reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)". determine whether there is As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "non-shortened fluctuation time". In addition, in the case of reach fluctuation, it is also possible to determine "reach group (type of reach)" from the reach mode random number and generate a fluctuation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not in operation (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "normal deviation reach fluctuation" Determine whether or not As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "usual deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of loss described above.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 17). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This processing is for judging the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot design random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 16) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 17). Then, similar to step S54, calculation using the comparison value is executed, and from the result, it is determined which winning symbol corresponds. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination determination value is set to "00H" when "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state" is set, and "01H" is set when it corresponds to a "symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". . In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit time variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern first determination means, pre-reading process execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding, for example, the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of the big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 17).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 14) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of special symbol game processing. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000), special symbol variation during processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device management processing. This configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) of (step S5000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the address of the return destination.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbols have not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and special symbol variation is in progress. If the process is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process. There are also known programming examples in which the CPU selects which process to execute next. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each process, and at the beginning step, it refers to the flags one by one and performs conditional branching (continuation/return). There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU72 performs the work of preparing the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbols. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1-byte data) is output to each segment and dot (numbers 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, and thereby the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. In this case as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win or a small win (a form other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. A big hit game or a small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Jackpot game]
For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a 10-round jackpot mode, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is energized for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). , the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a determined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are focused on the first variable prize winning device 30, thereby giving the player an opportunity to win a large number of prize balls (special game executing means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is called "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 times in total, these are sometimes collectively called "10 rounds". In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for the 10-round jackpot. As types of jackpots, not only the 10-round jackpot, but also other round jackpots may be provided.

In addition, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. A round number command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 124 in production|presentation control output processing (step S212 in FIG. 14). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big win game (big role) for that round only.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortening state) after the jackpot game is finished based on the game state flag (time shortening function operation flag) (time shortening state transition means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal pattern operation lottery is set from normal probability (low probability) to high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shortened and the variable start prize The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). In addition, a game machine that includes the elements of a so-called 2-type game machine (for example, a 1-type 2-type mixing machine or a 2-type game machine, that is, a jackpot game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small win game. In the game machine), the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the probability of winning the operation lottery of normal symbols is set to a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is operated, and the opening pattern of the variable start-up prize device 28 makes it easy to win a prize. Difficulty can be adjusted.

[small hit]
In addition, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a winning type other than non-winning. When a small win is won, a small win game is played separately from the big win game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game executing means). For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, a small winning game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small winning game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, after a predetermined opening time (for example, about 3 to 4 seconds), the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is held for a certain period of time (for example, 1.8 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted), It is excited over a preset number of times of operation (for example, once or more), thereby opening and closing the second variable winning device 31 in a determined pattern (operation of special electric accessory). During this time, the player is given an opportunity to win a certain amount of prize balls by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 (special game execution means).

In addition, in the variable winning device management process during the small winning game, the specific area solenoid 99 is energized for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of times (for example, once). The slide member 31c opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. By allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start a big hit game. That is, whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game determines whether or not to start the big winning game in the variable winning device management process. In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for small wins, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, a big win game corresponding to the winning type is started.

Also, even if the game with a small hit ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so the benefit of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (for that reason is not a prerequisite for ). It should be noted that when a small win is won in the "time shortened state", the "time shortened state" may end after the small win game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, "10-round jackpots 1 to 6" are provided as a plurality of winning types. ``10 round big wins 1 to 4'' are started when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a big win mode, and ``10 round big wins 5 and 6'' are stopped and displayed in a small win mode with the special symbols. It is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the winning game. In addition, when a big win is executed by "10 round big wins 5 and 6" (when a big win is executed via a small win), the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first variable winning device 31 operates in the remaining rounds. The variable winning device 30 is activated.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stop-displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round big win 1" corresponds to the big win of the "first winning symbol", and "10 round big win 2" corresponds to the big winning of the "second winning symbol". Also, "10 round big win 3" corresponds to the big win of "third winning pattern", and "10 round big win 4" corresponds to the big winning of "fourth winning pattern". Furthermore, the "10 round big win 5" corresponds to the "5th winning pattern" small win (big hit when passing through the specific area 31x), and the "10 round big win 6" corresponds to the "6th winning pattern" small win (specific area It corresponds to a big hit when passing 31x). For this reason, hereinafter, the "winning type" is appropriately referred to as "winning design".

[1st winning design]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "first winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning opening 30b is performed once for a sufficiently long period of time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "first winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of providing the player with 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In addition, the first big winning opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur within one round (the same applies hereinafter). . In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 1 time or 10 times).

[Second winning pattern]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "second winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning opening 30b is performed once for a sufficiently long period of time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "second winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of providing the player with 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time shortening function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[3rd winning design]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "third winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning opening 30b is performed once for a sufficiently long period of time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "third winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of providing the player with 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 1 time or 10 times).

[4th winning design]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "fourth winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning opening 30b is performed once for a sufficiently long period of time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "fourth winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of providing the player with 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time shortening function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[5th winning design]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "fifth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning game state is shifted to the big winning game state. In this case, from the second round, the first big winning hole 30b is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest), and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "fifth winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to provide the player with 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 1 time or 10 times).

[6th winning design]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "sixth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning game state is shifted to the big winning game state. In this case, from the second round, the first big winning hole 30b is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest), and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "sixth winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to provide the player with 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time shortening function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol", the "third winning symbol" or the "fifth winning symbol" is met, there is a possibility of shifting to the "time shortening state" after the jackpot game ends. .

In this way, when a small win is won in the internal lottery and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small win game, the big win game is executed, and after the big win game is completed, the time is shifted to a shortened state according to the type of the winning pattern. The game machine is called a so-called one-type two-type game machine.

[Special symbol change preprocessing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation preprocessing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76 . When the working memory numbers of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 14). When the demonstration setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (same hereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads the lottery random numbers (big hit decision random numbers, big hit pattern random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 in the order of acquisition. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the top section, and then shifts (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is saved, for example, in another temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next big hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random numbers are read out in the order in which they are stored (acquired) in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (digestion in winning order). It should be noted that, instead of such control of winning order digestion for each special symbol, priority digestion control that prioritizes digestion of the second special symbol may be used. Also, in this process, the main control CPU72 subtracts one from the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whichever shifted the random number) stored in the RAM76, and subtracts The latter value is set as the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, the display mode of the number of memories by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decrease by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 14). . After completing the procedure up to this point, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the preceding special symbol variation pre-processing, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than "0" (step S2100 in FIG. 20: Yes), the main control CPU72 executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 refers to the random number storage area and confirms whether or not the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol. This confirmation can be realized by confirming whether or not the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the first section of the random number storage area of the RAM76. At this time, when it is confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU72 designates the second special symbol as the target special symbol. This designation is performed by setting, for example, "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (step S2210: No), that is, if the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol, the main The control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM76. It should be noted that the specific contents of the processing are as already described in the previous special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S2218: Then the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the current target special symbol is the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the "variation start working memory number" from the value of the working memory counter after the subtraction. In addition, here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, after adding the value of the working memory counter, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation" may be set.

Step S2222: Also, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the target special symbol is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target special symbol is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the effect command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command of one word length, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described "effect command at the time of working memory increase". That is, the working memory number decrease effect command is a value of the lower byte (eg, "00H" to "03H") representing the number of working memories after the decrease with respect to the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. ”) is added, and an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is added (logical sum) to the value of the lower byte. Therefore, for the lower byte, the addition value "10H" is logically summed, and the second digit becomes "1". become a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time "4" (the command notation is "14H") has decreased by one, resulting in the current number of working memories being "3" (command The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result that the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") has decreased by one. , indicates that the current number of working memories is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: In addition, when the current target special symbol is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes effect command output processing. This processing is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the effect command set at the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (storage number notifying means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 20).

[See Figure 20: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes big hit determination processing (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). means). If the random number value read at this time is included in the jackpot value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H) and then proceeds to step S2400.

If the big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether the read random number value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "minor win" referred to here is anything other than non-winning (lose), but has a different nature from the "big win". In other words, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (game turning point) for shifting to the "time shortening state", but the "minor win" does not generate such an opportunity. A "minor hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for activating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for activating the condition device is not satisfied). Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned as a development to the "big hit" (the conditions for operating the condition device are satisfied). In any case, if the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. Thus, in this embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance as the hit range other than the non-winning, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and compared with the random number to determine the big hit.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big win is set to 1/319, and the small win is not set. In addition, in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit may be won. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/319, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 318/319 (=approximately 1/1), and it falls under It is designed not to. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it may correspond to a loss. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small win than a big win. In order to satisfy the probability of winning the big hit and the probability of winning the small win, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the big win value and the range of the small win value and compares them with the read random numbers.

In addition, the main control CPU72, in the non-shortening state (predetermined game state), lottery opportunity of the second special symbol (second lottery opportunity) less likely to occur than the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol (first lottery opportunity) occurs, a second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery executing means).

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the big hit flag has been set to the value (01H) in the previous big hit determination process. If the jackpot flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. In addition, the main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, set 01H) or a small hit (for example, set 0AH) by the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol determination processing when losing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of loss by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 . Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when lost) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 14).

In addition, in this embodiment, since 7-segment LEDs are used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of loss is always one segment (center The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H) with only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown) and executes variation pattern determination processing at the time of deviation (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of loss for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol, or corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. Variation patterns include various variation patterns such as normal variation (non-reach variation), reach variation, super reach variation, etc. (same applies to big wins and small wins). The information about the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command including information as to whether or not it is a special variation (the same is true for the big hit and the small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether it is the above-mentioned "time reduction state" or not, the main control CPU72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction status”. Also, even if it is not in the "time shortening state", the fluctuation time at the time of failure is set in step S2200, for example, "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display: 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display: 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of the fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of loss is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time (at the time of loss) to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time at the time of loss to the stop symbol display timer.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is lost (other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes) , the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be explained.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in a special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big-hit stop symbol selection table in the big-hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol based on the big-hit symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning pattern at the time of the big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown regarding the first special design is "first winning design" or "second winning design", and the breakdown regarding the second special design is "third winning design" or "fourth winning design". Each of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning design", "first winning design A", "first winning design B", "first winning design C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of winning symbols selected at the time of a big hit in the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table. When the result of this big win corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to this first special symbol big win stop symbol selection table (winning kind defining means) to determine the kind of winning symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the allocation values for each winning symbol. Equivalent to. In addition, the second column from the left shows "first winning symbol" and "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, when the jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol is selected, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 52/100 (=52%), and the percentage of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100. 48 minutes (=48%). The magnitude of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. to selectively determine winning patterns. In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. The stop symbol command is described, for example, as a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B1H" indicates that the current winning symbol was selected when the first special symbol was a big hit. represents. Also, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" in the lower bytes represent the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol jackpot, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
The column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of time reductions given after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, when it corresponds to the "first winning pattern", regardless of whether it is during normal (non-time reduction state) or during time reduction (time reduction state), the number of times of time reduction is 1 time (or 10 times ) is granted.

In addition, when it corresponds to the "second winning pattern", the number of times of time saving is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal time or during time saving. In addition, the number of times of time saving may be two times or more (11 times or more) without being limited to the above value.

Here, "1 time (or 10 times)" means that the total number of variations of the second special symbol is 1 time, or the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 times. It means that the shortened state ends.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the second special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72, when the result of this big win corresponds to the second special symbol, determines the kind of the winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol big win stopping symbol selection table (winning kind defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. . Similarly, the second column from the left shows "third winning symbol" and "fourth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, when the jackpot corresponding to the second special symbol is selected, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 50/100 (=50%), and the percentage of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 100. 50 minutes (=50%).

When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. to decide Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. Here too, the stop symbol command is described as a combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B2H" is selected when the winning symbol of this time hits the second special symbol. It means that Also, the EVENT value "01H" in the lower byte represents the type of winning symbol corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as "B2H01H". .

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions to be given after the jackpot game is finished is shown. In this embodiment, when the "third winning pattern" is applied, the number of times of time saving is provided once (or 10 times) regardless of whether it is during normal time or during time saving.

Also, when it corresponds to the "fourth winning pattern", regardless of whether it is normal or during time saving, the number of time saving times is given (not given).

[See Figure 20: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the variation pattern determination process at the time of the big hit (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach variation, a longer variation time than when losing is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of the big hit. In this process, if the winning symbol type (jackpot stop symbol number) determined in step S2410 is "first winning symbol" or "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 stores the flag area of the RAM 76. A time reduction function operation flag as a game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means).

By executing such a process, the main control CPU72, when winning in the winning pattern that shifts to the time reduction state (if a special condition is met), from the non-time reduction state (first state), multiple times It is possible to shift to a consecutive game state (state in which the second special symbol can be changed in the time shortening state and the non-time shortening state: second state, special state) in which the special game can be executed (state transition means) ).

Also, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win (stop symbol number at the time of the small win) based on the big hit symbol random number. Here, similarly, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win is defined in advance in the stop symbol selection table at the time of the small win (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol random number is used to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72 to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Election design at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, two types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the two types is "fifth winning design" and "sixth winning design". Incidentally, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fifth winning design", "fifth winning design A", "fifth winning design B", "fifth winning design C", and so on.

[Stop symbol selection table for second special symbol small hit]
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol small hit time stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the allocation value for each winning symbol. equivalent to a proportion of Similarly, the second column from the left shows the "fifth winning symbol" and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, at the time of the small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning design" is 50/100 (=50%), and the percentage of selecting the "sixth winning design". is 50/100 (=50%).

As a result of the small hit this time, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. In the second special symbol small winning stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. Here too, the stop symbol command is described as a combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B2H" was selected when the current winning symbol was a second special symbol hit. It means that it is something. Also, the EVENT values "03H" and "04H" in the lower bytes represent the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. For this reason, for example, when the "fifth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small win this time, the stop symbol command is described as "B2H03H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small winning stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the big winning game is started, and the number of times of shortening time given after the big winning game is finished. values are shown. In this embodiment, when the "fifth winning pattern" is applied, the number of times of time saving is provided once (or 10 times) regardless of whether it is during normal time or during time saving.

Also, when it corresponds to the "sixth winning pattern", regardless of whether it is normal or during time saving, the number of times of time saving is given 0 times (not given).

By using the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol big hit, the stop symbol selection table for the second special symbol big hit, and the stop symbol selection table for the second special symbol small hit, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time reduction state or In the case of "1st winning pattern", "3rd winning pattern" or "5th winning pattern" in the time shortened state (for the 5th winning pattern, it is limited to when a jackpot game is executed), time A transition condition to the shortened state can be satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Figure 20: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes a small hit variation pattern determination process (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. In this embodiment, the small hit is set only in the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a variation pattern having a variation time for the small hit is selected. In addition, you may set a small hit to a 1st special design lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop design (small hit design) by the second special design display device 35 based on the small hit stop design number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (when lost/when hit). In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol fluctuation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 . Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. After finishing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol fluctuation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 19: Processing during special symbol fluctuation, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, as described above, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count or interrupt counter value) Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the timer counter and controls the variable display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes zero. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) to the next jump destination.

Also, in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407 and S2410 in FIG. 20). Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time during the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol fluctuation flag.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process during special symbol stop display. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired, based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet expired (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection processing (step S1000 in FIG. 19) and repeats the special symbol stop display processing in the next interrupt cycle.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has expired (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Also, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol-fluctuation flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbols has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag value (01H) is set. If the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When elected]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management processing". Note that the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the time shortening function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (big role) is started, the game is shifted to the normal state (non-time reduction state).

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the time of the big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot flag value (01H) is not set in step S4300 (No), then step S4600 is executed.

Step S4600: The main control CPU72 then checks whether or not the small hit flag value (01H) is set. Then, the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set, and if it is simply a loss (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, if the small hit flag value (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation frequency update processing. In this process, when both the number of special variations of the first special symbol and the number of special variations of the second special symbol are 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special variations of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the first special symbol is stopped, a process of decrementing (-1) the number of special variations of the first special symbol is executed. Also, when the number of special variations of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the second special symbol stops, a process of decrementing (-1) the number of special variations of the second special symbol is executed. The number of special variations of the first special symbol and the number of special variations of the second special symbol are reset at the start of the jackpot game. In addition, regardless of whether the number of special variations of the first special symbol or the number of special variations of the second special symbol is 0 or 1 or more, when this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 is the first special symbol and a special variation frequency designation command reflecting the value of the special variation frequency of the second special symbol can be transmitted to the effect control device.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cutting counter. As for the "number of cutting counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM76. In this embodiment, a so-called cut time reduction function is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first cut counter value related to the time reduction state (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of times of time saving) is set to a predetermined value (for example 10 times), and the second cut counter value (number of times of time saving of the second special symbol) regarding the time shortening state is set to a specified value (for example 1 time). Information on the first cut counter value and the second cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the cut counter command.
It should be noted that the number-of-times cutting counter value related to the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value without providing two counter values such as a first number-of-cutting counter value and a second number-of-cutting counter value. good too.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first cut counter value or second cut counter value) is zero. At this time, if the number of cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the number cut counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the first cut counter value and the second cut counter value. Specifically, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, both the first cut counter value and the second cut counter value are decremented, and when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed decrements only the first tick counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of one of the number-of-times counter values (the first number-of-times counter value or the second number-of-times counter value) is zero. As a result of the subtraction, when none of the number-of-times counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if any of the number cutting counter values are 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the multiple cut function is activated. In this embodiment, the number-of-times cutting counter value for the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 1 time or 10 times). When the deviation variation of the second special symbol once in the time shortening state (including the small hit variation at that time when it does not pass through the specific area) is executed, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. On the other hand, even if the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed nine times in the time shortening state, the time shortening function operation flag is not reset, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed once in the time shortening state. When an off-variation is performed, the time reduction function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time shortening state ends after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the time reduction function activation flag is explained in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special design has passed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special design (before the start of stop display time measurement) good.
And, when the above procedure is finished, it returns to the special symbol game process.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortening state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the time shortening state reaches the first number (for example, once), or When the total number of fluctuations obtained by summing the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the time shortening state reaches the second number (for example, 10 times) larger than the first number condition is satisfied.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 14) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operating memory display setting process (step S1230) are performed by the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34 as already described. Generate and output a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a. processing.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation count display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the gaming state display device . First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU72 controls lighting of the time reduction state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time reduction function operation flag. For example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on, the main control CPU 72 turns on the time reduction status display lamp 38e. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Furthermore, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the firing position designation display lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by a big win game or a small win game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation display lamp 38f. Output. In addition, if the value (01H) is set to the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72 in addition to the above time reduction state display lamp 38e, the lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f to output In addition, when the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after a big win game, it lights up from the start of the big win game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

The time reduction state can be terminated at the end of the final variation (losing variation, small winning variation or big winning variation) in the time shortening state (at the start of the stop display time). In this case, the stop display time of the final variation in the time shortened state can be set to a longer time (15.0 seconds) than the stop display time (0.5 seconds) of other than the final variation. Note that the time shortening state may be terminated at the end of the stop display time of the final variation in the time shortening state.

In addition, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation count display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a, 38b corresponding to the jackpot pattern specified by the value of the number of continuous operation status is the target for outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "10 rounds (10R)". In addition, in this embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but there is, for example, a 4-round jackpot as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, when there is only one type of jackpot (when there are only 10-round jackpots), the jackpot type display lamp may not be lit.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a list of fluctuation pattern tables.
The variation pattern table includes seven variation pattern tables A to G.
The main control CPU 72 can select any one of the seven variation pattern tables A to G according to the game state. Each variation pattern table contains one or more variation patterns. For example, when the variation pattern table A is selected, the selected variation pattern may differ between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This point is the same for other variation pattern tables. In addition, the "game state" in the figure indicates the game state after the jackpot game ends (the game state of the shift destination). However, the "game state" in the figure may be the game state (game state before transition) before the start of the jackpot game.

The variation pattern table A is selected when the game state is "no time reduction (non-time reduction state)". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. Note that this table is selected even after the RAM is cleared.

The variation pattern table B is selected when the game state is "no time saving". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. The difference between the variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table B is that the variation pattern table B is a table that is selected within a specified number of variations (for example, up to 30 variations) after the time shortening state ends. . The fluctuation pattern table B is a so-called quick-stop prevention table.

The variation pattern table C is selected when the game state is "with time reduction (time reduction state)". Specifically, when the time-saving design in the normal state is elected (when the "first winning design" or "third winning design" is elected), when the first special design fluctuates 1 to 4, 6 to 9 selected. In this table, a variation pattern with a short variation time (eg, 1 second variation) is set for the first special symbol, and a variation pattern with a long variation time (eg, 120 seconds variation) is set for the second special symbol. is set.

The variation pattern table D is selected when the game state is "time saving". Specifically, it is selected during the time saving state. In this table, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, variation of 90 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

The variation pattern table E is selected when the game state is "no time saving". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state (remaining 1 time = when the second special symbol fluctuates for one fluctuation after the end of the time shortening state). In this table, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, variation of 120 seconds) is set for the second special symbol.

The variation pattern table F is selected when the game state is "no time saving". Specifically, it is selected when the variation pattern table B is finally changed.

The variation pattern table G is selected when the game state is "time saving". Specifically, it is selected when the first special symbol fluctuates by 5 or 10 when the symbol with reduced working hours is elected in the normal state. In this table, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, variation of 13.5 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortening state.
Here, the "number of times of time saving" in the figure indicates the value to be set to the first cutting counter value (total number of times of time saving of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (also in FIG. 29).

[No.1]
If the "winning design" is "1st winning design (1st special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number" is "10 times", and the "1st special design special fluctuation number" is " 10 times.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 4" and "6 to 9", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table C".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the big hit is "5" or "10", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table G".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.2]
If the "winning design" is the "second winning design (first special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "number of times of time saving" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the first special design" is "20 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.3]
If the "winning design" is the "third winning design (second special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number" is "10 times", and the "first special design special fluctuation number" is " 10 times.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.4]
If the "winning design" is "4th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "time saving number" is "0 times", and the "1st special design special fluctuation number" is "20 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 5 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)" and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "10 times" Then, "the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" becomes "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No 5 (non-passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "0 times”, and the “number of special variations of the first special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" becomes "0 times" , "The number of special variations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (not passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "0 times ”, and “the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the big hit game from the non-time shortening state is the second special symbol.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol changes, it becomes a big hit or a small hit, so there is no special change table after the second change.
Here, "time saving number of times of the second special symbol" in the drawing indicates the value to be set to the second cutting counter value (time saving number of times of only the second special symbol) (also in FIG. 30).

[No.1]
If the "winning design" is the "first winning design (first special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "second special design time saving number of times" will be "1 time", and the "second special design special The number of fluctuations" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table referred to is "variation pattern table C".

[No.2]
If the "winning design" is the "second winning design (first special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "time saving number of the second special design" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special design The number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table B".

[No.3]
If the "winning design" is the "third winning design (second special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number of the second special design" will be "1 time", and the "second special design special The number of fluctuations" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No.4]
If the "winning design" is "4th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", "2nd special design time saving number" is "0 times", "2nd special design special fluctuation The number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table B".

[No. 5 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)", and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, "Time saving number of times of the 2nd special pattern" is "1 time", and "the number of special variations of the second special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No 5 (non-passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)", and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, "time saving of the 2nd special pattern The number of times" becomes "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (pass through specific area)]
"Winning design" is "6th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, "Time saving number of 2nd special design" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special variations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table B".

[No. 6 (not passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, "time saving number of second special patterns ” becomes “0 times”, and “the number of special variations of the second special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortening state.

[No.1]
If the "winning design" is "1st winning design (1st special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number" is "10 times", and the "1st special design special fluctuation number" is " 10 times.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.2]
If the "winning design" is the "second winning design (first special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "number of times of time saving" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the first special design" is "20 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.3]
If the "winning design" is the "third winning design (second special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number" is "10 times", and the "first special design special fluctuation number" is " 10 times.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No.4]
If the "winning design" is "4th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "time saving number" is "0 times", and the "1st special design special fluctuation number" is "20 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 5 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)" and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "10 times" Then, "the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" becomes "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No 5 (non-passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "0 times”, and the “number of special variations of the first special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" becomes "0 times" , "The number of special variations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (not passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time saving number" is "0 times ”, and “the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game in the time shortening state is the second special symbol.
It should be noted that, as in FIG. 28, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol fluctuates, a big hit or a small hit occurs, so there is no special fluctuation table for the second and subsequent fluctuations.

[No.1]
If the "winning design" is the "first winning design (first special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "second special design time saving number of times" will be "1 time", and the "second special design special The number of fluctuations" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No.2]
If the "winning design" is the "second winning design (first special design, 10R, no time saving)", the "time saving number of the second special design" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special design The number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table E".

[No.3]
If the "winning design" is the "third winning design (second special design, 10R, time saving 1 time)", the "time saving number of the second special design" will be "1 time", and the "second special design special The number of fluctuations" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No.4]
If the "winning design" is "4th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", "2nd special design time saving number" is "0 times", "2nd special design special fluctuation The number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table E".

[No. 5 (pass through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)", and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, "Time saving number of times of the 2nd special pattern" is "1 time", and "the number of special variations of the second special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to is "variation pattern table D".

[No 5 (non-passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "5th winning pattern (2nd special pattern, 10R, time saving 1 time)", and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, "time saving of the 2nd special pattern The number of times" becomes "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

[No. 6 (pass through specific area)]
"Winning design" is "6th winning design (2nd special design, 10R, no time saving)", and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, "Time saving number of 2nd special design" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special variations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table E".

[No. 6 (not passing through specific area)]
If the "winning pattern" is "6th winning pattern (second special pattern, 10R, no time saving)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, "time saving number of second special patterns ” becomes “0 times”, and “the number of special variations of the second special symbol” becomes “0 times”.

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of variations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the variation pattern table to be referred to becomes "variation pattern table A".

By adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 can change the first special symbol variation time ( For example, 1 second) can be made relatively shorter than the variation time (eg, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortening state (first state) (variation time determination means) .

In addition, by adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72, after shifting to the consecutive game state (second state) and executing the big hit game, can perform the second game in the consecutive game state (second state). It is possible to make the variation time (for example, 120 seconds or more) of one special symbol relatively longer than the variation time (for example, less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time reduction state (first state) ( variable time determination means).

Furthermore, by adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 can determine the variation time (variation The pattern table D) is made relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special pattern (fluctuation pattern table C) when winning in the first special pattern lottery (first lottery) and shifting to the continuous state. possible (fluctuation time determination means).

By adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 can change the first special symbol variation time ( For example, 1 second) can determine the variation time so that it is relatively shorter than the variation time (eg, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortening state (first state) (variation time determining means).

In addition, by adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72, after shifting to the consecutive game state (second state) and executing the big hit game, can perform the second game in the consecutive game state (second state). Determine the variation time so that the variation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) is relatively longer than the variation time of the first special symbol in the non-time reduction state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds) possible (fluctuation time determination means).

Furthermore, by adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 can determine the variation time (variation The pattern table D) is set to be relatively longer than the variation time of the first special symbol (fluctuation pattern table C) when winning the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) and shifting to the continuous state. A variable time can be determined (variable time determining means).

[Variable winning device management processing]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of variable winning device management processing. The variable winning device management process includes a game process selection process (step S5100), a large winning opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a large winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S5300), a large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and finished. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process to the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and completes up to the large winning opening opening/closing operation process. If so, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the large winning opening opening/closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Large prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This processing is for setting the conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big win or the small win, and the time for each opening. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag value (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, if the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5203. On the other hand, if the big hit flag value (01H) is not set (No), that is, if the small hit flag value (01H) is set, the main control CPU72 then executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of the big win is set based on the symbol-specific opening pattern setting table at the time of the big win. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the small winning symbol opening pattern setting table. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, and returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of big winning. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the role product continuous operation device, and the "role product continuous operation device" refers to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 30. It is a device that can operate the variable winning device 31 continuously. In addition, the "condition device" and the "accessory continuous operation device" can also be used as flags for control. Therefore, as long as this condition device is not operating, it means that the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the jackpot game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "big win start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of the big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the jackpot symbol-by-symbol opening pattern setting table, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol type related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents the setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, for example, the number of execution rounds, opening time, interval time, and the like. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Opening pattern setting table for each pattern at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table classified by symbol at the time of a big hit. The opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit defines the opening and closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) to be operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. is. Specifically, the opening patterns of the following big winning openings are determined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning design]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the first winning symbol. The number of rounds to be executed is 10 rounds, 10 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds during each round from the 1st round to the 10th round. It operates to open the first big winning hole 30b (however, it is closed when the upper limit number of balls is confirmed. The same applies hereinafter). Therefore, when the first winning symbol is obtained, it is possible to substantially obtain balls for 10 rounds.

[Second winning pattern]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the second winning symbol. The number of rounds to be executed is 10 rounds, 10 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the tenth round. It operates to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the second winning symbol is obtained, it is possible to obtain balls for 10 rounds.

[3rd winning pattern]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the third winning symbol. The number of rounds to be executed is 10 rounds, 10 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the tenth round. It operates to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the third winning symbol is obtained, it is possible to obtain balls for 10 rounds.

[4th winning pattern]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the fourth winning symbol. The number of rounds to be executed is 10 rounds, 10 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the fourth winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the tenth round during each round. It operates to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the winning symbol corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for 10 rounds.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of winning symbol by referring to the symbol-by-symbol opening pattern setting table at the time of the big win.

[See FIG. 34: Big Winning Opening Pattern Setting Process for Big Win]
Step S<b>5216 : The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30 . Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated in each round (first round to final round) during the jackpot game to the first variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. do. In the present embodiment, the opening patterns corresponding to the winning symbols (first winning symbols to third winning symbols) at the time of all the big hits are the first round to the final round, so that the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 10 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the opening pattern corresponding to the 10-land jackpot. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot time open timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) per time when opening the big winning opening for each round at the time of the big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the release time of the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (first to third winning symbols) at the time of the big win. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for rounds with balls. Therefore, if the value of the open timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the open time is a sufficient time (for example, launch 10 or more game balls are shot by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is the time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets an interval timer at the time of the big hit. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer for the release patterns corresponding to all winning symbols (first to third winning symbols) at the time of the big win. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and the opening is temporarily closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous actuation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 33).

[Processing for setting the pattern of opening the big winning opening at the time of the small hit]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for setting a pattern for opening a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (during small hit game)" as an internal state flag for control. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small winning game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the small hit opening pattern setting table and selects an opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents the setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, for example, the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, the opening time of the specific area 31x, etc. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Small hit opening pattern setting table]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a small hit opening pattern setting table. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening and closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In this embodiment, one opening pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of opening patterns may be set for each winning symbol.

The second variable winning device 31 is the variable winning device to be activated when a small hit is achieved. Also, the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two times, and the opening time for one time is 0.9 seconds. Note that the interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific area 31x (the timing of turning ON the specific area solenoid 99 and operating the specific area slide member 31c) is 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started.
In addition, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (timing to turn off the specific area solenoid 99 and deactivate the specific area slide member 31c) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started. .

[See FIG. 36: Big Winning Opening Pattern Setting Process for Small Hits]
Step S 5256 : The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31 . Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small winning game to the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of opening times to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In addition, in this embodiment, two times is set as the number of times of opening the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit opening timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) per time when opening the big winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 second is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between the opening of the big winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. Note that in this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 seconds). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an opening timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small winning game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. In this embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started. be done.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 33).

[Grand prize opening opening/closing operation processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening opening/closing operation process. This processing is mainly for controlling the opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. FIG. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is "in duty". Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and determines whether the current internal state is " Check whether or not the status is “In a big role”. It should be noted that the "during a big win (during a jackpot game)" flag is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of the big win: step S5212) or during the process when passing through a specific area to be described later. . As a result of this confirmation, if the current internal state is "during heavy duty" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5306. On the other hand, if the current internal state is not "during heavy duty" (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second large winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (apply to the second large winning opening solenoid 97 output a drive signal). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first big winning opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first big winning hole 30b based on the set opening pattern (applies power to the first big winning hole solenoid 90). output a drive signal). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 32).

[Second Grand Prize Opening Opening/Closing Operation Processing]
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 executes the timer countdown of the opening time, and opens the second big winning opening 31b after the opening time has passed. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 . As a result, the second variable prize winning device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. Note that timer countdown processing may be separately provided before step S5310.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 counts down the opening timer set in the previous process (steps S5260 and S5264 of the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 36)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second big winning hole 31b, the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is counted down. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes specific area opening/closing operation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the specific area slide member 31c to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99). process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second big winning opening 31b has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the open timer for the second big winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 31b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. On the other hand, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 31b has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the second variable winning device 31 (opened large winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the open time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of prize-winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize-winning balls) permissible per opening at the time of a small hit, as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the main control CPU 72 repeats the above steps S5310 to S5320.

If it is determined that the opening time has ended in step S5316 (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5320 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. In addition, since the value of the open timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for opening at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally detects that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the open time has expired before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second big winning opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the driving signal applied to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON based on whether the value of the specific area passage flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second big winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main Control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, if the specific area passing flag is not ON (No), that is, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second big winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. It should be noted that there is a possibility that the specific area passing flag will be set to ON during the previous specific area opening/closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes specific area passage processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 activates the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device based on the game ball passing through the specific area 31x while the second big winning hole 31b is open during the small winning game. , the process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game executing means via special game, special game executing means). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 36)). When the interval timer value becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the calling source from step S5327a for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 32). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is executed directly instead of from the top step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU72 increments the value of the counter for the number of openings of the second big winning opening. The value of the counter for the number of openings of the second big winning opening is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented second big winning opening open number counter has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why ``the number of times set in the current round'' is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of ``opening the second variable winning device 31 a plurality of times during one small winning'', for example. is. In addition, especially when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so the counter value will increase with one opening and closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting the release pattern of ``opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small win'', the counter value still reaches the set number of times when one opening is completed. (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open number counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the big winning opening closing process.

[Specific Area Opening/Closing Operation Processing]
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific area opening/closing operation process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has started. Specifically, the main control CPU72 counts down in the countdown process (step S5312) by checking whether the value of the opening timer for the opening start time related to the opening of the specific area 31x is 0. Check if the 31x open time has started. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU72 releases the specific area 31x. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99 . As a result, the specific area slide member 31c is actuated to shift the specific area 31x from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and checks whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area preliminary flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. It should be noted that the specific area passing flag and the specific area spare flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the open timer related to the opening of the specific area 31x counted down in the countdown process (step S5312) is 0, so that the opening time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5340. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 39).

Step S5340: The main control CPU72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the specific-region slide member 31c returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 39).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU72 terminates the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "during small winning game" from the internal state flag, and ends the small winning game on the control process (end of small winning). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be operated continuously, and a big win game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "big win start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of winning symbol. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the pattern-specific release pattern selection process when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the pattern-specific opening pattern setting table when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is achieved. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 operates a variable prize winning device for each round (second round to final round) during the big win game based on the release pattern corresponding to the special symbol when the small win is won. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30 . The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game, based on the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is achieved. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the release pattern corresponding to the fifth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets an opening timer for the big hit. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) per time when opening the big winning opening for each round at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (fourth winning symbol to sixth winning symbol) related to the special symbols when a small hit is made. For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for rounds with balls. Therefore, if the value of the open timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the open time is a sufficient time (for example, launch 10 or more game balls are shot by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is the time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot time interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol when a small win is achieved. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 seconds is set after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and the opening is temporarily closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of the fifth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous actuation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes the pattern-specific time reduction function setting process when passing through the specific area. In this process, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol at the time of the small hit is the "fifth winning symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the time shortening function operation flag to ON (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function actuating means).

By executing such a process, the main control CPU72, when winning in the winning pattern that shifts to the time reduction state (if a special condition is met), from the non-time reduction state (first state), multiple times It is possible to shift to a consecutive game state (a state where the second special symbol can be changed in the time shortening state and the non-time shortening state: the second state) in which a big hit game (special game) can be executed (state transition means) ).

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation number setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of special variations of the first special symbol and the number of special variations of the second special symbol according to the winning symbol. Specific numerical values of the number of special fluctuations are as described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. FIG.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the last address of the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 39).

[Open pattern setting table for each pattern when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The pattern-specific opening pattern setting table at the time of passing through the specific area defines the opening/closing operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round for each different winning pattern related to the special pattern when a small win is achieved. Specifically, the opening patterns of the following big winning openings are determined for each winning symbol.

[5th winning pattern]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. FIG. Also, the number of execution rounds is 10 rounds. Since the number of executed rounds includes the operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 which is opened by the small win, the jackpot game to be started from now on will have 9 rounds, which is 10 rounds minus 1 round. It becomes the number of rounds in the substantial jackpot game (the same applies to the sixth winning symbol below). The opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b per round in each round is 29.0 seconds. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning pattern related to the special symbol at the time of the small win is the fifth winning pattern, when the big win game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small win is regarded as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 9 rounds worth of balls.

[6th winning pattern]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30.例文帳に追加Also, the number of execution rounds is 10 rounds (the substantial number of rounds in the jackpot game is 9 rounds). The opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b per round in each round is 29.0 seconds. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning pattern related to the special symbol at the time of the small win is the sixth winning pattern, when the big win game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small win is regarded as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially nine rounds worth of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 refers to the pattern-specific opening pattern setting table when passing through the specific area, and sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit occurs. It will be done.

[1st Grand Prize Opening Opening/Closing Operation Processing]
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first big winning opening opening/closing operation process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5380: The main control CPU72 opens the first big winning hole 30b. Specifically, it outputs a driving signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 . As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 34) at the time of the big hit, or step S5364 in the specific area passing process (in FIG. 41)) Run the open timer countdown. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first big winning opening 30b has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first big winning hole 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the first big winning hole 30b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. On the other hand, if the opening time of the first big winning hole 30b has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable prize winning device 30 (the large prize winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the open time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big win) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 repeats the above steps S5380 to S5390 because the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage.

If it is determined that the opening time has ended in step S5386 (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. If the value of the open timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S5390 before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number. In most cases, it is determined in S5386 that the open time has ended.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the driving signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 set in the previous process (step S5222 of the big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 34) at the time of the big hit, or step S5366 in the specific area passing process (in FIG. 41)) Execute the interval timer countdown. When the interval timer value becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 32). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is executed directly instead of from the top step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the open number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why ``the number of times set in the current round'' is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, ``opening the first variable winning device 30 multiple times in one round during the jackpot''. is. In this embodiment, since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value usually reaches the set number of times in one opening/closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398 next.

If a pattern is adopted in which opening and closing operations are repeated a plurality of times within one round as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening operation (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening counter is incremented in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the big winning opening closing process.

[Grand Prize Opening Closing Process]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process. This big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (jackpot game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the first round is completed, and the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage toward the second round. When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game and the big winning game is started after the small winning is finished, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small winning is treated as the first round, and the big winning is achieved. The first round in which play is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented round number counter has reached the set execution round number. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the incremented round number counter value (1 to 15), and if the value is less than the set execution round number (14 or 15 after subtracting 1) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current round number based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, which is the next jump destination. After executing the large winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again after executing the large winning opening closing process, and repeats the above steps S5402 to S5408. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously performed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

Steps S5410, S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (=0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to end processing.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation executing means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not in a big role (step S5401: No), it increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after incrementing has reached the set open number. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of small winning (step S5258 in FIG. 36). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, which is the next jump destination. Then, after executing the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process again, and after the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No), step S5416. , step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

Steps S5414, S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the opening number counter (=0), the next jump destination is set to end processing.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of termination processing. This ending process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 . An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5502: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5503. do.

Step S5503, step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit game state ends in the control processing of the main control CPU 72 . In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases "during a big hit" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big win game on the control process (end of the big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function activation flag is 01H (set). This flag is set during the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2414 in FIG. 20) during the big hit and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 20), and during the previous specific area passing processing during the specific area passage time reduction function setting processing (Fig. This is set in step S5370 in 41).

Step S5512: And, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of times of time reduction (for example, 1 time (or 10 times)). The set value of the number of times of time saving is stored in the time saving count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time saving frequency set here becomes the upper limit frequency for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of times of time saving, the number of times cutting counter values (first times cutting counter value, second times cutting counter value) related to two types of time saving states are prepared. Here, the first cut counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and is set to "10" as an initial value. Also, the second cut counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and is set to "1" as an initial value. If the value of the time reduction function activation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU72, when the conditions for shifting to the time reduction state are satisfied (when the predetermined transition conditions are satisfied, when winning with winning symbols to shift to the time reduction state ), after the end of the jackpot game, from the non-time-reduced state (predetermined game state), favorable conditions were applied compared to the non-time-reduced state (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortening state (advantageous game state) in which the open time is extended (advantageous game state transition means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation number setting processing. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 in FIG.

The procedure up to this point is for the case of a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "in play" from the internal state flag. It should be noted that in the case of a small win, such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag, especially since the internal conditioning device is not activated.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on the flag. Specifically, in accordance with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the big win, a state designation command representing "normal" as the game state is generated. Also, if the time reduction function activation flag is set, it generates a state designation command indicating "time reduction" as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 19) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow (Part 1)]
FIG. 46 is a diagram explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the normal mode.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode (park mode). "Normal mode" is a "non-reduced time state".

[F1] When a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during a game in the normal mode, [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "loss", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and [F5] the first winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big winning game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode. [F8] The drive mode at this time is the "time reduction state". In this embodiment, in the drive mode, two performance modes with different ways of showing the performance are prepared, and the player can select one of them. Specifically, the two production modes are an earth drive mode (hereinafter abbreviated as "earth mode") in which a background image showing a car with a female character driving on the earth is displayed. , and a space drive mode (hereinafter abbreviated as “space mode”) in which a background image showing a spacecraft with aliens on board is displayed.

[F4] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "big win (winning probability 1/319)" and [F7] the second winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big win game is executed, and [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the time shortening state.
[F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning hole 28b during the game in the drive mode in the time shortening state (if the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol is displayed. fluctuate.

[F13] If the 2nd special symbol lottery results in a "big win (winning probability 1/319)" and [F14] the third winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big win game is executed, and [F8] time-reduced drive mode. transition to

[F13] If the 2nd special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and [F15] corresponds to the 4th winning symbol, [F6] a big winning game is executed, and [F20] drive in a non-reduced time state. mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in "small win (winning probability 318/319)", [F17] corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode is shifted to a time reduction state.

[F16] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes "small win (winning probability 318/319)", [F19] corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F20] the drive mode is shifted to a non-reduced time state.

[Game Flow (Part 3)]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state.
[F20] When the game ball enters the right start winning hole 28b during the game in the drive mode in the non-time shortening state (if the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] Second special symbol fluctuates.

[F13] If the 2nd special symbol lottery results in a "big win (winning probability 1/319)" and [F14] the third winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big win game is executed, and [F8] time-reduced drive mode. transition to

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in a "big win (winning probability 1/319)" and [F15] corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, [F6] a big win game is executed, and [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in "small win (winning probability 318/319)", [F17] corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode is shifted to a time reduction state.

[F16] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes "small win (winning probability 318/319)", [F19] corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

Thus, in the present embodiment, once entering the time reduction state (continuous state), a total of 2 with the change of the second special symbol for one time reduction and the memory of one second special symbol. It is possible to obtain an opportunity for a hit (big hit or small hit). Then, when winning with winning symbols with time reduction in either of the two opportunities, the game has a game characteristic of returning to the time reduction state (continuous state) again. Therefore, as long as there is no time-saving winning symbol in succession on these two occasions, the player can continue to stay in the drive mode.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 and the operation of the drum unit 200 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (symbol display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lighting/blinking display by the 7-segment LED, they lack visual appeal. Similarly, the aspect of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is also a symbolic design such as a 7-segment LED. It lacks visual impact as a winning design. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 are performed.

In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect pattern Hz (main pattern), the marker M1, the marker M2, the fourth patterns Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the advance notice effect, and the like. , the drum unit 200 displays pseudo performance symbols such as 7 symbols.

The effect pattern Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, three patterns of a left effect pattern, a middle effect pattern, and a right effect pattern. displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed in each of the performance symbols. Here, the left effect pattern, the middle effect pattern, and the right effect pattern constitute a pattern sequence (effect pattern array) in which the numbers "9" to "1" are arranged in descending order. Such pattern rows are variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

The pseudo effect symbols displayed on the drum unit 200 include three pseudo left effect symbols displayed on the left reel 201, pseudo medium effect symbols displayed on the middle reel 202, and pseudo right effect symbols displayed on the right reel 203. These are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display area of the drum unit 200 . Each reel includes 7 symbols, a panda symbol, and a cherry symbol, and the pseudo performance symbols are variably displayed by rotating each reel.

49 and 50 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols. Here, an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 is shown for the variation of the special symbol when the winning is not won (lost). This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is a effect showing that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is displayed. Here, before describing the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the variable display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described first.

[Before change display]
(A) in FIG. 49: For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to change (the state in which the demo effect is not in progress), three lines of the effect symbol Hz are displayed in the area on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display 42. is displayed. At this time, according to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (marked with reference signs M1 and M2 in the figure) are displayed to indicate the working memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. ing. These markers M1 and M2 correspond to the first special symbol and the second special symbol working memory number (the number of display of the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a). The displayed number increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In order to facilitate visual discrimination, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (o), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed, for example, as a heart. is displayed in the form of In the illustrated example, when all four markers M1 are illuminated, it indicates that the working memory number of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by broken lines). indicates that the working memory number of the second special symbol is zero. In addition, since the maximum value of the working memory number of the second special symbol is one, only one marker M2 is illuminated at maximum.

In addition, a fourth pattern (reference symbols Z1 and Z2 are attached in the drawing) is displayed in the lower right area of the liquid crystal display 42 . The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle and right effect symbols, and are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the effect symbol Hz. The fourth patterns Z1 and Z2 are simply colored marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and by changing the display color, for example, a variable display can be expressed. The fourth design Z1 corresponds to the first special design, and the fourth design Z2 corresponds to the second special design.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the loss. This is to objectively clarify that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally, and that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually a "big win" or a "minor win" instead of "lose", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). is stopped.

On the other hand, on the active line in the middle of the drum unit 200, a "panda pattern" corresponding to "missing" is displayed.

[Variation display effect start]
(B) in FIG. 49: For example, each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variable display effect. is started (symbol effect executing means). In the figure, the variable display of the pseudo performance symbols of the drum unit 200 and the variable display of the performance symbols Hz are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image expresses the landscape of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in presentation is, for example, the "normal mode". "Normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. These mode differences correspond to internal "time reduction states". Although not particularly shown here, after this, for example, an image of a character, an item, or the like may be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, so that an advance notice effect is performed.

Further, during the variable display of the production pattern Hz, the fourth pattern Z1 is displayed in a variable manner at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth pattern Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color. .

[Left production design stop]
(C) in FIG. 49: For example, after a certain amount of time (approximately half the fluctuation time) has passed, first, the pseudo left effect pattern of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The pattern stops changing. In this example, "7 green symbols" are stopped at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 as the pseudo left effect symbol, and the number "8" is displayed as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern to represent is stopped.

[Example of production when the number of working memories is reduced]
Here, as shown in FIG. 49 (B) above, since the number of working memories of the oldest first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the leftmost position in conjunction with it The number of displayed markers M1 that had been displayed is reduced by one. That is, until then, the working memory number of the marker M1 was four in total, but the marker M1, which is the display of the memory number of the earliest (oldest) memory, is hidden, and an effect that is consumed by internal lottery is performed. will be As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the total number of working memories has been reduced to three, and the working memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the example of (C) in FIG. 49, since the working memory at the top in the order of storage is consumed and the number remaining is three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are aligned one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here, leftward) is performed. As a result, it is possible to accurately express the before-and-after relationship of the change in the number of working memories in the performance, and to instruct the player in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner that ``the working memory has been consumed and one has been reduced''. can.

[Right production pattern stop]
(D) in FIG. 50: Next, a "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and a number is displayed as a right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 50: A stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (losing) mode, the pseudo performance symbols on the drum unit 200 and the performance symbols Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 are the same. , a stop display effect is performed in a non-winning (lost) mode. That is, in the illustrated example, a "panda symbol" as a pseudo medium effect symbol is stopped at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "1" is displayed as a medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing is stopped. In this case, the combination of the simulated performance symbols displayed on the middle effective line of the drum unit 200 is the misalignment of "seven green symbols" - "panda design" - "panda design", which is the performance design of the liquid crystal display 42. Since the combination of Hz is "8" - "1" - "3", it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "missing". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stop-displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the loss.

The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each variation. Through such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning, and to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery in the effect.

[Example of production at the time of a big hit]
51 to 53 are continuous diagrams showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of the big hit. Here, in addition to the ready-to-win effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and an advance notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (pre-notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach occur) to be executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following ready-to-win effect, for example, the first special symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol" after the variation display according to the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34. (For example, the 7-segment LED "self", "yo", "mouth", "mi", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) reach production execution means).

[Variation display effect]
(A) in FIG. 51: Almost in synchronism with the start of variation of the first special symbol (or second special symbol), each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating, and the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates. By doing so, the variable display effect is started.

[Advance notice before the occurrence of reach (1st stage)]
(B) in FIG. 51: After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the liquid crystal display 42 performs the first-stage ready-to-win pre-occurrence effect using a picture card (picture card) of the character. This advance notice effect before the occurrence of ready-to-win is a notice effect in which changes in mode progress in stages from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, two to five steps) in accordance with a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the advance notice effect before occurrence of the ready-to-win is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen (other modes of appearance may be used). Note that the "notice before occurrence of reach" is an effect that foretells the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit. By executing such a "pre-notice effect before occurrence of ready-to-win", it is possible to obtain the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that "the game may develop into a ready-to-win = the possibility of a big win increases".

[Notice production before reaching (second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 51: After the first stage of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win situation is executed, the change in the form of the notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win situation progresses to the second stage. Here, as the second-stage pre-notice production before the occurrence of reach, a production using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed overlapping the front of the previously displayed pattern image. Moreover, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the pattern image previously displayed. In addition, the character represented by the pattern image utters a line (for example, "I'm going to be a reach", etc.).

The advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach (second stage) using such a second pattern image is a step further from the notice effect before occurrence of reach (first stage) performed in (B) of FIG. It is an advanced type. The aspect of the "pre-notice effect before the occurrence of reach" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here is an example in which the 2nd stage pattern image appears in the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach, but in the production mode in which the 3rd, 4th, and 5th stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed There may be. Further, for example, the size may be increased each time the third, fourth, and fifth stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. Note that the variable display effect is continued even at this stage. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big win with this change by allowing the change in the form of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win to proceed to more stages. (For example, progress to level 5 suggests maximum expectations, etc.).

[Stop the left direction pattern]
(D) in FIG. 52: In the middle of the variable display effect, the pseudo left effect pattern of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop varying. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 as the pseudo left effect symbol, and the number "7" is displayed as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern to represent is stopped.

[Occurrence of reach state]
(E) in FIG. 52: Next, the simulated right effect pattern of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 and the right effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop changing. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 as the pseudo right effect symbol, and the number "7" is displayed as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern to represent is stopped. As a result, in the pseudo production pattern of the drum unit 200, the ready-to-reach state of "7 red patterns" - "fluctuating" - "7 red patterns" occurs, and in the production pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, "7 ”-“fluctuating”-“7” reach state occurs. At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice such as "Reach!" is performed. After the ready-to-win state occurs, the ready-to-win production at the time of winning is executed. It should be noted that the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 may be displayed in the state of "fluctuation"-"fluctuation"-"fluctuation" without generating a clear ready-to-win state.

[Notice production after reaching]
(F) in FIG. 52: Shortly after the reach state has occurred, the liquid crystal display 42 displays a forewarning effect after the reach occurrence, in which images representing, for example, a “heart” figure form a group and pass obliquely across the screen. done. In this case, the images of the "group of hearts" are suddenly displayed on the screen as if they are flowing, thereby enhancing the visual appeal to the player. By executing such a visually lively advance notice effect after occurrence of ready-to-win, an effect of making the player feel a greater sense of expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 53 (G): Following the advance notice effect after the occurrence of reach, on the liquid crystal display 42, an enemy character "pumpkin ghost" appears on the left side of the screen, and a friendly character "male character" appears on the right side of the screen. ” appears and the characters “VS” appear in the center of the screen.

(H) in FIG. 53: At the end of the ready-to-win production, the “pumpkin ghost” unleashes countless punches, and the “male character” fights back with chops. In this state, if the "male character" wins, it will be a big hit, and if the "male character" loses, it will be lost.

[Stop display effect (performance when winning)]
(I) in FIG. 53: Together with the characters "Victory!!", "male character" is displayed in a large size, and "pumpkin ghost" is displayed in a small size, which means a big win. Substantially in synchronism with the stop display of the special symbols, the variation of the simulated mid-effect symbols on the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 and the mid-effect symbols Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 stops. In this example, "7 red symbols" is stopped as the pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is displayed as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern to represent is stopped. The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a big hit (for example, red display color).

It should be noted that when the prize is not won (when the prize is lost), the words "defeat..." are displayed together with "pumpkin ghost" in a large size and "male character" in a small size. In this case, the "panda symbol" is stopped as the pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the effect representing a number other than "7" is displayed as the middle effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 in the effect symbol Hz. The pattern is stopped.

[During the big role]
FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of an effect during a big role that is executed during a game in which a small winning game passes through a specific area, becomes a big winning, and becomes a time shortening state after the end of the game. It should be noted that the following effects during the big role are effects executed on the liquid crystal display device 42 . In addition, in the following description, "when it becomes a big hit game after passing through a specific area during a small win game" is collectively referred to as "big hit game", "during big win game", "big win", "during big win". There is

[Small hit game start (opening start)]
In FIG. 54 (A): When a small winning game that makes it easier to pass through a specific area is started, text information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen during the opening time, and a special message is displayed during the big winning game. (for example, a female character) is displayed.

["Right-handed" display during heavy duty]
In addition, in this embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right part of the game area 8a, the right part of the game area 8a is specified as the shooting position (shooting direction) of the game ball during a big win. I'm doing it. Therefore, under the control of the main control CPU 72 , the firing position designation display lamp 38 f is lit and displayed, and a firing position designation command representing “right hitting” is transmitted to the effect control device 124 . In response to this, guidance information (an arrow indicating the right direction, letters of "right hitting", etc.) is displayed on the display screen to prompt "right hitting" on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[V prize promotion (1st round)]
(B) in FIG. 54: During the small winning game, it is the first round of the big winning game via passing through the specific area during the small winning game. In order to execute the jackpot game after the second round, it is necessary for the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x within the valid time during the small hit game. Therefore, in order to promote passing through the specific area (so-called "V winning"), for example, an arrow image indicating the right direction is displayed on the screen together with text information of "Let's enter the V!". Further, for example, 10 ◯ marks are displayed together with the character information "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. The leftmost ○ mark is displayed in red (hatched with oblique lines), and the remaining nine ○ marks are displayed in white. This means that the number of rounds in which the ball can be obtained is ten, the current round is the first round (substantially during a small winning game) among the ten rounds, and the round in which the ball can be obtained. It is possible to teach the player that the ◯ mark is displayed in red each time progresses by one.

[10th round]
(C) in FIG. 54: After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and, for example, when the game shifts to the tenth round, for example, all ten ◯ marks are displayed in red. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained are completed in the 10th round.

[Time shortened state rushing effect]
(D) in FIG. 55: Then, using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game, an effect is executed in which character information such as "Enter drive mode!" is displayed. Thus, the player can be informed that the "drive mode" is about to start. In addition, an arrow indicating the right direction is displayed together with text information such as ``Keep playing right,'' so that the player can be taught that the game proceeds with hitting right even in the ``drive mode''.

Here, during the ending production, a notification such as ``Be careful not to forget to take out the prepaid card'' is given to remind the user to forget to take out the prepaid card, or ``Be careful not to get addicted to the game'' to prevent addiction to the game. You may make it perform alerting|reporting.

[Jackpot game end, time shortened]
(E) in FIG. 55: When the jackpot game ends and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car in which the woman is riding. It is changed to an image that expresses how it runs on the ground. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time reduction state different from the normal state.

[Time-saving production]
In this way, when the game is progressing in the time shortening state, the time-saving middle production (advantageous game state production) for displaying the background image corresponding to the time shortening state (advantageous game state) is executed.

[Right-handed suggestion production]
Also, in the upper part of the screen, an effect suggesting hitting to the right is being executed. In the right-handed suggestion effect, a band-shaped area is provided in the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-shaped area. In addition, such a right hitting suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortening state. By executing such an effect, the player can be urged to "hit to the right".

[Remaining count display effect]
Furthermore, at the bottom left of the screen, the remaining number of times display effect is being executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the bottom left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times that the game can be played in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In addition, in the example shown in the figure, the information of "two times remaining" is displayed. The remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time-reduced drive mode or the non-time-reduced drive mode. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortening state or the non-time shortening state.

[Example of production in drive mode (time reduction state)]
FIGS. 56 to 58 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects in the drive mode.

(A) in FIG. 56: In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing the car in which the woman is riding on the ground. The combination of the pseudo performance symbols displayed on the active line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the winning combination of ``seven red symbols''-``seven red symbols''-``seven red symbols'', and the performance of the liquid crystal display 42. The combination of symbols Hz is a winning item of "7"-"7"-"7". This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Also, in the upper part of the screen, a right-handing suggestion effect is being executed, and such a right-handing suggestion performance is continuously performed when the game state is the time reduction state.
The backlight of the drum unit 200 may emit light in a predetermined color in conjunction with the background image of the liquid crystal.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbols]
(B) in FIG. 56: When the first special symbol is hit for the first time, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four memories (markers M1) of the first special symbol are stored. Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, when the memory of the first special symbol is not stored, the variation of the second special symbol is first executed by the player executing a right-handed stroke. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z1 on the liquid crystal display 42 also start to vary. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of variation of the first special symbol]
(C) in FIG. 56: When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost state, the dummy effect symbol of the drum unit 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also lost. is stopped and displayed in the form of During this time, the player hits to the right, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start prize winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball enters the right start prize opening 28b. . In this case, one second special symbol memory (marker M2) is accumulated.

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains two times remaining.

(D) in FIG. 57: Since the memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the winning order, after this, the remaining three memories of the first special symbol are digested. Then, when the remaining memory of the first special symbol is consumed, an internal lottery is executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 on the liquid crystal display 42 also start to vary. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol, it is assumed that a small hit is won.

[Small hit start, 2nd big prize opening open]
(E) in FIG. 57: Then, when the second special symbol is stop-displayed in the form of a small win, the pseudo performance symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol" - "cherry symbol" - "cherry symbol"), The effect pattern Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") on the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth pattern Z2 (green display color) on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stop-displayed in a small winning mode. As a result, a small winning game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, an effect is executed in which the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and advances to the right side of the screen. Also, for example, the player hits right during the variation of the second special symbol, the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball enters the right start winning opening. Assume that the ball is entered in 28b. In this case, one second special symbol memory (marker M2) is accumulated.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as one remaining time.

(F) in FIG. 57: When the small winning game (substantial first round) is started, an effect is executed in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim for the lower right attacker." As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball must enter the second variable prize winning device 31 .

[Pass through specific area]
(G) in FIG. 58: The second variable winning device 31 is shifted to the open state due to the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small winning is the sixth winning symbol. do. In this example, an effect is executed in which a female character riding in a car raises a heart mark with the letter V drawn on it and utters a line such as "You did it! It's a BIG BONUS!!". As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that a big hit game (BIG BONUS) is about to start.

[Small win ends, big win game starts]
(H) in FIG. 58: After that, the small winning game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the big winning game (substantial 2nd round or later) is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the female character utters similar lines. In addition, the display screen displays an arrow pointing to the right and text information such as ``Keep right-handed'', so that the player can be taught that the big win game will proceed with right-handed. Note that the effect image is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

After that, the effect during the big win game similar to the above is started, and the big win game progresses. For example, if the winning pattern at the time of the small win regarding the 2nd special pattern corresponds to the 6th winning pattern, substantially 9 rounds worth of balls (10 rounds worth of balls including the small winning game) are obtained. can do. In addition, when the jackpot game is executed in the drive mode, it is possible to execute a special effect during the winning in the drive mode.

FIGS. 59 and 60 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state. Such a situation occurs mainly because the final variation of the time shortening state corresponds to the big hit of the "fourth winning symbol" or the small win of the "sixth winning symbol" and the big win game is executed, and the second 2 This is the case where the memory of the special design is accumulated.

Here, it is assumed that one memory of the second special symbol exists. For this reason, production|presentation in time saving is continuously performed. Further, as the remaining number of times display effect, information of "one remaining time" is displayed. However, the right hitting suggestion production is not executed.

[During display of special symbols]
(A) in FIG. 59: When the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-shortening state, the drum unit 200 starts rotating along with it, and the effect symbol Hz and the number displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The 4 symbols Z2 also start to change.

[Continuation of variable display effect]
(B) in FIG. 59: The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the drive mode in the non-shortening state. Further, along with this, the rotation of the drum unit 200 continues, and the effect pattern Hz and the fourth pattern Z2 on the liquid crystal display 42 also continue to fluctuate. In addition, since the situation here is not the time shortening state, even if the starting gate 20 is passed, the probability that the variable starting prize winning device 28 will be long open is low. Therefore, it is basically impossible to accumulate the memory of the second special symbol. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time-reduction state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates once at maximum.

[Stop display effect]
(C) in FIG. 59: Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery for the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small win mode, the pseudo performance symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol" - "cherry symbol" - "cherry symbol") and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42. Hz (a combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth pattern Z2 (green display color) on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small win mode. In this case, an effect is executed in which the animal character holds up a "mark with the number 7 displayed".

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 remaining times.

[Small hit start, 2nd big prize opening open]
(D) in FIG. 60: Then, when the small winning game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened, and the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and advances to the right side of the screen. executed. At this time, an effect is executed in which the animal character is left behind.

[Pass through specific area]
(E) in FIG. 60: The second variable winning device 31 is shifted to the open state due to the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small winning is the sixth winning symbol. do. In this example, an effect is executed in which a female character riding in a car raises a heart mark with the letter V drawn on it and utters a line such as "You did it! It's a BIG BONUS!!". As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that a big hit game (BIG BONUS) is about to start.

[Small win ends, big win game starts]
(F) in FIG. 60: After that, the small winning game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the big winning game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the female character utters similar lines. In addition, the display screen displays an arrow pointing to the right and text information such as ``Keep right-handed'', so that the player can be taught that the big win game will proceed with right-handed. After that, the effect during the big win game similar to the above is started, and the big win game progresses. Then, when the jackpot game is executed in the drive mode in the non-time shortening state corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the game shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot game ends.

[Example of production according to condition occurrence]
Next, a description will be given of an example of the effect control during the important role used in the present embodiment. The production example (FIG. 54) in the case of passing through the specific area during the small winning game and becoming the big winning game has already been described. In addition, in the present embodiment, while the drive mode continues several times in the game flow after the big win game, predetermined effects are executed according to the occurrence of various conditions that may occur during the game, A specific effect can be executed by occurrence of another condition. Therefore, an example of an effect corresponding to the occurrence of a condition during a game will be described below.

[Example of predetermined production during production of important role]
FIGS. 61 and 62 are continuous diagrams showing examples of predetermined effects that can occur during the big role effects. It should be noted that the following examples of effects are effects executed on the liquid crystal display device 42 .

[Small hit game start (opening start)]
(A) in FIG. 61: As explained earlier ((A) in FIG. 54), during the opening time of the small winning game that makes it easier to pass through the specific area, for example, text information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen. Along with being displayed, a unique effect image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. Also, at this time, a display prompting "right-handed hitting" is displayed to alert the player to the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 31.例文帳に追加

During the opening time, the game ball rolls along the upper surface of the opening/closing member 31 because the second variable prize winning device 31 has not yet been opened.

[V prize promotion (1st round)]
(B) in FIG. 61: The second variable winning device 31 is opened and the first round starts. In this case, an effect for promoting passage through the specific area (V winning) is executed as described above, and character information and an arrow image of "Let's enter the V!" are displayed.

At this time, since the specific area slide member 31 is pulled into the board surface, the game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 can easily (possibly) pass through the specific area. Also, since the second variable winning device 31 is open, a game ball can enter during this time.

[PV production starts with V prize]
(C) in FIG. 61: Although not shown in the previous example (FIG. 54), when passing through a specific area occurs during a small win game, a big win starts, and a promotion video (PV) effect during the big win starts on the screen. , playback of the music corresponding to this is started. In this example, a female character and characters modeled after various animals and creatures are displayed on the screen, and are shown to be doing some kind of action. It should be noted that an effect sound or the like may be output when passing through the specific area. Also, although the term "promotional video" is used here, any effect image with content related to the model of the pachinko machine 1 may be used.

After that, the second variable winning device 31 is closed, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened from the second round.

[During the 3rd round PV production]
(D) in FIG. 61: After that, the jackpot game progresses, and the opening operation of the first variable winning device 30 is performed in the third round. In the screen, the image of the promotional video effect is continuously displayed.
Thereafter, the 4th to 6th rounds of the jackpot game progress.

[Predetermined effect occurs during PV effect during 7 rounds (1)]
(E) in FIG. 62: For example, it is assumed that the current jackpot game is after the drive mode has been continued for a plurality of times (so-called jackpot series). At this time, game balls enter the first variable prize winning device 30 even in the 7th round, and the total number of paid out prize balls during the big win game including the first big win is 5000 (the number is just an example). ) is reached. In this case, as a predetermined effect corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a condition that the cumulative number of winning balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number), for example, the number-of-balls-out notification effect is executed (predetermined effect executing means).

In this example, a text display of "5000pt OVER!" is displayed, and an effect sound is output. In addition, the number-of-balls-out notification effect is displayed so as to interrupt the display of the promotional video effect, so that it has a high priority as an effect. By generating such a presentation of the number of paid balls, it is possible to make the player aware that ``the total number of paid balls has exceeded 5000'', thereby maintaining interest in the game. It should be noted that the number-of-balls-out notification effect that cuts into the screen ends in a short period of time (for example, about 2 to 3 seconds) after it occurs.

Although not particularly shown, the predetermined effect may be, for example, a mode in which the number-of-balls-out notification effect is continuously executed during the jackpot game. For example, the accumulated number of awarded balls so far may be displayed in a relatively small size at a predetermined position (for example, upper right position) in the screen, and the accumulated number of awarded balls may be displayed during the jackpot game. .

[Predetermined effect occurs during PV effect during 8 rounds (2)]
(F) in FIG. 62: For example, in the eighth round of the jackpot game, it is assumed that more than a predetermined number (10) of balls enter the first variable prize winning device 30 . Normally, the first variable prize winning device 30 is closed when the opening time (29 seconds) elapses or when the count number reaches a predetermined number (10). Since the opening/closing member 30a is in the open position until the number is counted, for example, when game balls enter close to each other as shown in the drawing, the number of balls exceeding a predetermined number is counted within one round. Sometimes. Alternatively, if a game ball enters during the closing operation of the opening/closing member 30a, or if the game ball caught between the opening/closing member 30a and the ball entrance falls due to its own weight, the count switch 84 counts within the valid time. If so, more than the specified number of hits may be counted in one round. In such a case, it becomes a so-called "over winning", which is advantageous for the player. (predetermined effect executing means).

In this example, a mini version of the female character is displayed at the lower right position of the screen, and an effect is executed in which the female character jumps and utters a line such as "You did it!". At the same time, dialogue is output as voice. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware of the occurrence of an advantageous situation of "over winning" and to maintain interest in the game.

[During the 10th round PV production]
(G) in FIG. 62: After that, the jackpot game progresses, and the opening operation of the first variable winning device 30 is performed in the tenth round. In the screen, the image of the promotional video effect is continuously displayed. In addition, since the 10th round is the last round of this big win game, the first variable winning device 30 is closed when the opening time elapses or when a predetermined number of counts are counted.

[during the ending]
(H) in FIG. 62: With the end of 10 rounds, the first variable prize winning device 30 is closed and the jackpot game ends (ending time), making it difficult for game balls to enter. In this case, the promotional video presentation that has been executed up to that point is terminated, and the ending image is displayed on the screen. In this example, text information such as "Continue drive mode" is displayed, along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and text information such as "Keep hitting right" is displayed. At the same time, a warning such as "Be careful not to forget to take out your prepaid card" is issued. In addition to this, a notification such as "Pachinko is a game to be enjoyed moderately" may be performed.

The above are examples of the predetermined effects (1) and (2) that are executed according to the occurrence of the predetermined conditions during the jackpot effect (during the promotion video effect). In addition, a predetermined effect may be executed in response to the occurrence of some predetermined condition, and is not limited to the predetermined effects (1) and (2).

As described above, the predetermined effect is triggered by a sudden event "predetermined condition occurs" during the game. This is mainly assigned as a function of predetermined effects to announce unexpected events such as "the cumulative number of prize balls due to consecutive big hits has reached the number of divisions" and "occurrence of an advantageous situation due to over winning". This is because Therefore, the predetermined effect is not of a nature that is systematically executed at the start of the jackpot game, but is executed with the occurrence of a dynamic condition as a trigger.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an effect may be executed in a planned manner at the start of the jackpot game. For example, ``the number of continuous big wins has reached a specific number'' or the like is used as a trigger, and a performance assigned with a function of putting one break (closing) on the course of the big win game so far is executed. Such an effect is executed as a "specific effect", and since it is necessary to give a certain amount of impact and weight to the player, it is executed over a plurality of rounds during the jackpot game, for example. become a thing. An example of the specific effect will be described below.

[Execution example of specific effect]
63 and 64 are continuous diagrams showing an execution example of a specific effect. Note that the specific effect is different from the predetermined effect, and is executed as part of the important role effect.

[Small hit game start (opening start)]
(A) in FIG. 63: At the timing of the opening start, the specific effect has not yet started, and the same opening image ((A) in FIG. 61) is displayed.

During the opening time, the game ball rolls along the upper surface of the opening/closing member 31 because the second variable prize winning device 31 has not yet been opened.

[V prize promotion (1st round)]
(B) in FIG. 63: As before, the second variable winning device 31 is opened to start the first round. In this case, an effect for promoting passage through the specific area (V winning) is executed as described above, and character information and an arrow image of "Let's enter the V!" are displayed.

Similarly, since the specific area slide member 31 is pulled into the inside of the board surface, the game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 can easily (possibly) pass through the specific area. Also, since the second variable winning device 31 is open, a game ball can enter during this time.

[Movie playback production starts with V prize]
(C) in FIG. 63: When passing through a specific area occurs during a small winning game, a big role is started, and a movie reproduction effect is started as a specific effect in the screen, and the reproduction of music corresponding to this is started. In this example, a female character is shown happily waiting for people in front of a fountain in a park, and in terms of production, it reminds us that some kind of story will develop after this. Also, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the special effect during the current important role is a specific effect, the character's lines may be voice-output in accordance with the movie image being reproduced. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the current presentation is different from the previous promotional video presentation. It should be noted that the output of the effect sound may be suppressed (silenced) when the movie playback effect is started when the specific area is passed.

Although not shown in the figure, in the second round after this, for example, the female character monologues, "Oda-kun, it's late, can you come?" Scenes such as talking monologues and constantly worrying about the clock are played as movies. In addition, a scene in which a female character recalls a conversation with a male character is reproduced as a movie. As a result, the player can be made more aware that "some kind of story video is being reproduced", and can be made to pay attention to the subsequent development.

[During 3 rounds, during movie playback]
(D) in FIG. 63: In the third round of the jackpot game, for example, a scene in which a male character (Nobu Oda), who is waiting for a female character, appears is displayed in a movie playback effect. In this example, a scene develops in which a female character finds a male character, smiles and waves her hand, and the male character comes up there. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel "I'm glad that the person I've been waiting for has appeared" from the development so far.

Although not shown, the movie reproduction effect is continuously executed from the fourth round to the sixth round after this. During this time, the displayed scenes progress along a certain story, making it possible to make the player more and more empathetic.

[Predetermined effect action (1) suppression during movie playback effect during 7 rounds]
(E) in FIG. 64: The jackpot game has progressed up to the 7th round, and the story is progressing in the movie reproduction effect in accordance with this. In this example, a female character and a male character walk together in a park and have lively conversations. As a result, the player can be made to pay more attention to future developments, thereby suppressing the decrease in motivation for playing the game.

On the other hand, it is assumed that the total number of winning balls has reached a predetermined number (for example, 5000) based on the continuous history of hits so far. In this case, in the previous example ((E) in FIG. 62), as a predetermined effect in response to the occurrence of the predetermined condition, the number of ball-out notification effect was executed, but such effect is executed in an interrupting manner. Therefore, it is not very preferable to execute it during the movie reproduction effect. In other words, during the movie playback effect, it is necessary to make it easier for the player to empathize with the story and concentrate on the content in order to maintain interest. On the contrary, it has the opposite effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if a predetermined condition based on, for example, the total number of winning balls occurs during the movie reproduction effect, the effect operation is suppressed without executing the predetermined effect. Therefore, the number-of-balls-out notification effect as in the previous example ((E) in FIG. 62) is not generated. As a result, the desire to play can be maintained without hindering the interest of the movie reproduction effect.

[Predetermined effect action (2) suppression during movie playback effect during 8 rounds]
(F) in FIG. 64: The jackpot game progresses up to the 8th round, and the story further progresses in the movie playback effect accordingly. In this example, a female character and a male character buy drinks at a shop and enjoy the drinks together as they develop into a date. This makes it possible for the player to have the impression that the story is finally coming to an end, and to maintain interest in the game.

On the other hand, it is assumed that more than a predetermined number (10) of balls enter the first variable winning device 30 in the eighth round. In this case, in the previous example ((F) in FIG. 62), as a predetermined effect in response to the occurrence of a predetermined condition, an excessive winning notification effect was executed, but such a effect should also be interrupted in the screen. Therefore, it is not very preferable to execute it during the movie reproduction effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if an event that is advantageous to the player, such as an over-winning, suddenly occurs during the movie reproduction effect, the effect operation is suppressed without executing the predetermined effect in response to the occurrence of the predetermined condition. do. Therefore, it is decided not to generate the excessive prize winning notification effect as in the previous example ((F) in 62). As a result, the desire to play can be maintained without hindering the interest of the movie reproduction effect.

[During the 9th round, the movie playback effect ends]
(G) in FIG. 64: Here, for example, at the timing in the middle of the jackpot game progressing up to the 9th round (the round end condition is not satisfied), the effect execution time of the movie playback effect (so-called effect scale) has ended. Assume the case. The movie reproduction effect is continuously executed for a predetermined reproduction time, and ends when the reproduction time elapses. In this example, a sense of intimacy is created between the female character and the male character, and the story has a happy ending. In addition, the character information "~Fin~ (end)" is displayed on the screen to indicate that the current movie reproduction effect has been completed.

[During the 9th round, switching to the PV production, restarting the specified production]
(H) in FIG. 64: In this case, the production during the important role is switched to the promotion video production during the remaining 9 rounds. In this example, it is switched to the promotional video presentation that was executed in the previous example (FIG. 61). In addition, for the predetermined effect, suppression of the effect operation is finished (released). Therefore, when some predetermined condition occurs during the 9 rounds, the above-mentioned effect for notifying the number of balls to be played and the effect for notifying the excess winnings can be executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the promotion video effect is executed during the jackpot game, various predetermined effects can be executed according to the occurrence of the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to maintain interest by executing a predetermined effect in real time based on dynamically occurring game results and ever-changing game histories.

On the other hand, when a movie reproduction effect requiring a certain amount of effect time is executed as a specific effect during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the effect operation of the predetermined effect during the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest and a decline in interest in the specific performance, and to suppress a decline in desire to play.

Furthermore, when the movie reproduction effect is completed as planned, the effect during the important role can be switched to the promotion video effect thereafter, so that the predetermined effect can be generated thereafter. As a result, interest can be similarly maintained by the predetermined presentation.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effect operation will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, notice effect before reach occurrence, memory number display effect, effect during big role, promotion video effect during big role, number of balls released notification effect (predetermined effect), excess winning notification effect (predetermined effect), movie Playback effect (specific effect), effect using liquid crystal display 42 or drum unit 200, time saving effect, right-hand hitting effect, remaining number display effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control processing.

[Production control processing]
The effect control device 124 has a function as a effect control processor (overall control unit) and a function as a effect reproduction processor (individual control unit), as described with reference to FIG. By cooperating, the operation of each device (screen display by liquid crystal display 42, audio output by speakers 54, 55, 56, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52 and board surface lamp 53, etc., various movable bodies by movable body motor 57 motions, etc.) are controlled to realize performance reproduction in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, the operating subject when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor (overall control unit) is referred to as the "effect control unit 210", and the effect reproduction processor (individual control unit ), depending on the device to be controlled, the "display control unit 220", "audio control unit 222", "lamp control unit 224", "movable body control unit 226" or " It is called an input control unit 228”. These control units 220, 222, 224, 226, and 228 functioning as effect reproduction processors (individual control units) may be collectively referred to as "each individual control unit". Also, an action subject that manages the time for effect reproduction will be referred to as the "time management unit 230" or "ACT".

As a rough flow of the effect control, first, when the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, a command for instructing the reproduction of the effect according to this content is stored in the RAM 130 (storage means). (effect control means). The command output by the effect control section 210 is transmitted to each individual control section at a predetermined timing by the time management section 230 . In response to this, each individual control unit refers to the command, gives specific instructions to each device based on the contents of the command, and controls the operation of each device (effect control means, effect operation control means). As a result of such control, an effect operation is executed by each device (specific effect execution means, predetermined effect execution means, effect operation execution means). That is, the command output by the effect control section 210 uniquely specifies the effect operation of each device (effect operation command).

Note that each individual control unit can specify one effect operation by one received command or by combining a plurality of commands when controlling the effect operation of each device. In addition, the time management unit 230 activates a control table that defines the details of the effect operations associated with the content of the command, along with the transmission of the command to each individual control unit, or instead of the transmission of the command. is also possible. When the control table is activated, each individual control unit analyzes the contents of the control table and gives specific instructions to each device based on the contents.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control section 210. As shown in FIG. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from reset start (main) process (not shown), for example. The effect control unit 210 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt period (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

Production control processing includes command reception processing (step S400), working memory production management processing (step S401), production design management processing (step S402), other production processing during time reduction and pseudo time reduction (step S402a), and drum unit production management processing. (step S403), effect management processing during special fluctuation (step S403a), display output processing (step S404), lamp drive processing (step S406), sound drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410) and others (step S412) subroutine group. The basic flow of the effect control process will be described below along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives a command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU72. Also, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. It should be noted that the production commands sent from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special target determination production command, (special symbol) production command when the number of working memories increases, (special pattern) production command when the number of working memories decreases, start Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop pattern command, pattern stop command, state designation command, round number command, firing position designation command, error notification command, jackpot There are an end effect command, a change pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a count counter command, various error commands, a special change count designation command, and the like.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls execution of the above-described memory number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the marker M1. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and controls the first variable winning device 30 or the second It also controls the contents of the presentation when the variable winning device 31 is opened and closed. In addition, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects effect patterns of various announcement effects (pre-notice effect before occurrence of reach, announcement effect after occurrence of reach, etc.). Thus, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 42 (the effect symbol Hz, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the markers M1 and M2, the effect contents related to the effect during the big role, (contents of various advance notice effects) is executed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control unit 210 executes other effect processing during time saving and pseudo time saving. In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of determining the effect contents related to the right-hand hitting suggesting effect, the remaining count display effect, and the like.

Step S403: In the drum unit effect management process, the effect control section 210 executes the process of controlling the drum unit 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect pattern management process. Thus, in the drum unit effect management process, the effect control section 210 executes the process of determining the effect content to be displayed on the drum unit 200 (the effect content related to the pseudo effect pattern, the content related to the movement of the drum unit 200).

Step S403a: In the special fluctuation production management process, the production control unit 210 determines whether or not to execute the special fluctuation production based on the special fluctuation number designation command. Execute the process of determining whether to execute the special fluctuation production.

Specifically, the production control unit 210, when a special variation pattern for a short time (about several seconds) is selected, the production pattern for executing a non-reach production (for example, a production in which the production pattern is changed at high speed). If a special variation pattern with a long time (about several tens of seconds) is selected, a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect or the like is executed.

Step S404: In the display output process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends the display control unit 220 to the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the working memory effect pattern number, the pre-reading notice output pattern number, variable effect pattern number, variable notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.). In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives specific drawing instructions to the VDP 152 based on the content of the command, and controls the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 .

Step S406: In the lamp driving process, first, the effect control section 210 outputs a command for instructing the content of the effect to the lamp control section 224. FIG. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the contents of the command and outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132 to drive (turn on) the various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like. or turn off, blink, change luminance gradation, etc.).

Step S408: In the next sound driving process, the effect control unit 210 first sends the effect contents (for example, during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect, BGM, audio data, etc.) to the sound control unit 222 etc.) is output. In response to this, the audio control unit 222 instructs the audio IC 134 to output specific contents based on the contents of the command, and outputs sounds (sound effects, BGM, etc.) from the speakers 54, 55, 56 according to the content of the production. output.

Step S410: In effect random number update processing, the effect control section 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. FIG. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for advance notice selection, a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In the other processing, for example, the effect control section 210 first outputs a command to instruct the content of the effect to the movable body control section 226, for example. In response to this, the movable body control section 226 instructs the SMC 199 on specific control contents based on the contents of the command. In response to this, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern for the movable body 40f based on the instruction from the movable body control section 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to this to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and performs effects in synchronism with the image display by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-described effect control processing, the effect control section 210 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1 . Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory presentation management process]
FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation storage effect management process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S700: First, the production control unit 210 confirms whether or not the production command for increasing the number of working memories is received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is saved. When it is confirmed that the production command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control unit 210 executes step S702. In addition, when it cannot confirm that the production|presentation command at the time of an increase in working memory number is preserve|saved (step S700: No), the production|presentation control part 210 does not perform step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is increased. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect of displaying the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of reduction of the number of working memories is received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved. When it is confirmed that the production command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the production control unit 210 executes step S706. In addition, when it cannot confirm that the production|presentation command is preserve|saved at the time of the working memory number reduction|decrease (step S704: No), the production|presentation control part 210 does not perform step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 extinguishes the marker M1 or the marker M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery, and slides the remaining markers M1 and M2 that are not consumed by the internal lottery in the left direction. to select.
After completing the above procedure, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 65).

[Production pattern management process]
FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of production symbol management processing. Effect symbol management processing includes execution selection processing (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and when the variable winning device is in operation. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). The basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described below along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable display effect has not yet started, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display process (step S506) is selected. Also, the variable winning device operation time processing (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management processing (step S5000 in FIG. 19) is selected in the main control CPU72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs the work of adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. In addition, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the ready-to-win effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning pattern), variation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the notice effect ( Pre-reach warning pattern, post-reach warning pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control section 210 also controls a demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect, the input control unit 228 monitors whether the player has operated the effect button, and the effect content ( button effect) is instructed to each individual control unit by a command.

Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit to control the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. For example, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect by a command. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 actually terminates the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbols, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (execution of the symbol effect). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is activated, the effect control section 210 controls the contents of the effect during the small winning game or the big winning. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the contents of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Production pattern change pre-processing]
Next, FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the above effect symbol variation pre-processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S600: The production control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demonstration production command has been received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a command for demonstration effect is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes demonstration selection processing. In this process, the effect control section 210 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.
It should be noted that the presentation indicating the state of waiting for a customer may display content to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as ``Let's be careful not to become addicted to the game''. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute an effect related to prevention of addiction at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process as it is, and in the following display output process (step S404 in FIG. 65) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 65), the content of the demonstration effect is changed based on the demonstration effect pattern. Control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the change of this time is lost (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control section 210 executes step S612. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not this time's variation is lost based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the lost normal variation or the lost reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command designates a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (lost) (step S604: No), then the effect control section 210 confirms whether or not this change is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big win is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control section 210 executes step S610. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is not stored (No), only the lottery result command at the time of the small win remains, so in this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. . It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is a big hit based on the variation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is the big hit. Also, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a big win symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a big win.

Step S608: The production control unit 210 executes a small hit fluctuation production pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU72. The production pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the production control unit 210 refers to a production pattern selection table (not shown) to select the production pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. can be done. Incidentally, the effect pattern number may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

In addition, when the production pattern number is selected, the production control unit 210 refers to the production table (not shown), and the production pattern Hz corresponding to the variable production pattern number at that time and the fluctuation schedule (variation time) of the fourth patterns Z1 and Z2, Determine the mode of stop display, etc.

For example, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect pattern Hz and the fourth pattern Z2 in the state of the "drive mode" when the second special symbol changes in the time shortening state, and finally corresponds to the small win. A process of selecting an effect pattern for stop-displaying the effect pattern Hz and the fourth pattern Z2 is executed.
On the other hand, the production control unit 210 changes the production design Hz and the fourth design Z2 in the state where the "drive mode" is continued or in the normal mode, for example, at the time of the small hit variation of the second special symbol in the non-time shortening state. Finally, a process of selecting an effect pattern for stop-displaying the effect symbol Hz corresponding to the small hit and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure is for the case of a "minor hit", but if it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control section 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control section 210 executes a variation effect pattern selection process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU72. It should be noted that, in the process of selecting the performance pattern at the time of a big hit, the process may be further branched for each stop symbol at the time of a big win.

In addition, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the production control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), then step S612 is executed.

Step S612: The production control unit 210 executes a variation production pattern selection process when losing. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of loss based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 . The effect pattern number at the time of losing is classified into "normal loss fluctuation", "short time loss fluctuation", "loss reach fluctuation", etc. Further, a detailed reach fluctuation pattern is specified for "loss reach fluctuation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 .

When the production pattern number at the time of loss is selected, the production control unit 210 refers to a production table (not shown), and the production pattern Hz corresponding to the fluctuation production pattern number at that time and the fluctuation schedule (variation time, Determines presence or absence of reach occurrence, reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence, and mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.). It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of losing is the same as at the time of the big hit.

After executing any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612, the effect control unit 210 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the notice selection process (prediction effect executing means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects by lottery the details of the advance notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or not winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility of the ready-to-win state occurring during the variable display effect, or to notify the player of the possibility of finally winning a big win or a small win. . Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set low when the game is not won, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set higher than when the game is not won in order to increase the player's expectation when the game is won.

Step S616: The effect control unit 210 executes mode effect management processing (advantageous game state effect executing means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, the effect control unit 210, in principle, when the internal state is the non-time-reduction state, executes the process of selecting the background image corresponding to the normal mode, and when the internal state is the time-reduction state , the process of selecting a background image corresponding to the drive mode (more specifically, the mode selected by the player from the earth mode and the space mode; for example, the earth mode is selected in the initial state) (time saving processing for selecting the medium effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, even if the internal state is the non-time shortening state, the effect control unit 210 stores the second special symbol when the time shortening state is changed to the non-time shortening state. In this case, a background image corresponding to the drive mode is selected (advantageous game state effect execution means, advantageous game state effect continuation execution means). Incidentally, such an exceptional process is executed in the effect symbol stop display process to be described later.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol fluctuation process (step S504 in FIG. 67), the variable display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variable effect pattern (symbol effect executing means), A notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Processing when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of processing when the variable winning device is activated. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S800: The effect control section 210 confirms whether or not the result of this variation was a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to the big win or the small win. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this variation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control section 210 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this variation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control unit 210 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control unit 210 executes the processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of the big hit. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big win game to the end of the big win game.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit of the effect content corresponding to the selected effect pattern. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 instructs the VDP 152 to display various effects images corresponding to the effect pattern for the big win stored in advance in the CGROM 190 as effects during the big win to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Instruct to read according to the design.

In addition, the processing (subroutine) executed by the effect control unit 210 in the processing at the time of operation of the variable winning device at the time of the big hit includes the following.
(1) Effect Pattern Determination Processing During Important Role In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect pattern of the above-described effect during important role (promotion video effect, movie playback effect).
(2) Predetermined effect execution management process during big role In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect pattern of the above-described predetermined effect (delayed ball number notification effect, excessive winning notification effect).
The contents of the production pattern determination process during the big role and the predetermined production execution management process during the big role will be further described later using another flowchart. It should be noted that processing other than the above is included in the process at the time of operation of the variable winning device at the time of the big hit.

Step S804: The production control unit 210 executes a small hit time variable winning device activation process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small win to the end of the small win.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern indicating that the small winning game has started at the start of the small winning game and an effect pattern suggesting hitting to the right. When passing through the specific area 31x, it selects an effect pattern when passing through the specific area, and instructs each individual control unit of the effect contents corresponding to these effect patterns. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 instructs the VDP 152 to read an opening start effect image ((A) in FIG. 61) at the start of the small winning game, or instructs the VDP 152 to read the effect image for promoting the V winning prize. ((B) in FIG. 61). Also, when passing through the specific area, an instruction to read out an effect image (not shown) at the time of V winning may be given.

Alternatively, when the production control unit 210 instructs a small winning game start production pattern by winning in a time shortening state (drive mode), the display control unit 220 instructs the VDP 152 that the female character is on at the start of the small winning game. An instruction is given to read out an effect image ((E) in FIG. 57) showing a car speeding up and an effect image ((F) in FIG. 57) suggesting hitting to the right. Further, when passing through the specific area, an instruction is given to read out an effect image ((G) in FIG. 58) showing a female character riding in a car holding up a heart mark with the letter V drawn on it.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 67).

[Production pattern determination process during important role]
FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the production pattern determination process during important role. As described above, the effect control unit 210 executes this process in the process (FIG. 69) when the variable winning device is activated at the time of the big hit. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S850: The effect control section 210 confirms whether or not the current winning (winning a small prize) is a winning from the time shortening state. When a small hit is won in the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control section 210 next executes step S852. On the other hand, if the winning is from the non-time shortening state and not the small winning from the time shortening state (No), the effect control section 210 executes step S860.

[When elected from the time shortened state]
Step S852: In this case, the effect control unit 210 refers to the game history up to now. The game history records, for example, the number of consecutive wins after shifting to the time reduction state (drive mode) after winning from the non-time reduction state, and the total number of prize ball payouts so far. Stored in the history storage area.

Step S854: Next, the effect control section 210 determines whether or not the conditions for executing the movie reproduction effect are satisfied. This condition can be fulfilled, for example, in the following cases. Note that the execution conditions are not limited to the following examples.
(1) When the number of consecutive wins after shifting to the time reduction state reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times).
(2) When the total number of prize balls paid out so far due to consecutive winnings after shifting to the time shortening state has reached a specific number (for example, 6000).
In any case, when the effect control unit 210 determines that the condition for executing the movie reproduction effect is satisfied (Yes), then step S856 is executed. On the other hand, if the movie reproduction effect execution conditions have not yet been satisfied (No), the effect control unit 210 proceeds to step S860.

[When the performance execution conditions are met]
Step S856: In this case, the effect control section 210 executes movie reproduction effect pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the pattern number of the movie reproduction effect to start reproducing from the start of the jackpot game (at the time of passing through the specific area).

[When the performance execution conditions are not met or when winning from a non-time-reduced state]
Step S860: In this case, the effect control section 210 executes a PV effect pattern selection process during a major role. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a promotion video effect pattern that starts playing from the start of the big win game (at the time of passing through the specific area).

Step S858: After returning from either step S856 or step S860, the effect control unit 210 executes a command set process for specifying the effect pattern during a major role. In this process, the effect control unit 210 sets the effect pattern specification command during the important role based on the selected effect pattern selected in the previous step S856 or step S860. The specification of commands will be further described later.

When the above procedure is executed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the processing at the time of variable winning device activation at the time of the caller at the time of the big hit.

[Predetermined effect execution management process during important role]
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for managing the execution of a predetermined effect during a big role. As described above, the effect control unit 210 executes this process in the process (FIG. 69) when the variable winning device is activated at the time of the big hit. This process is interrupted, for example, triggered by the occurrence of a ball entry event into the first big winning hole 30b. Note that the effect control unit 210 may execute this process as a timer interrupt process.

Step S870: The effect control section 210 refers to the game history. The game history here can be, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out by successive winnings after shifting to the time shortening state, and the count number of balls entering the first big winning hole 30b within one round.

Step S872: The effect control section 210 determines whether or not a predetermined effect execution condition (predetermined execution condition) has occurred. For example, from the above game history, if the total number of paid out prize balls reaches a predetermined number (eg, 5000, 10000, 15000, 20000, etc.), or if the number of counts in the current round When the predetermined number is exceeded, the effect control unit 210 determines that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 next executes step S874. In addition, when it is determined that the predetermined effect execution condition is not satisfied (No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S874.

Step S874: The effect control section 210 executes a predetermined effect pattern specification command set process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to the game history event that satisfies the execution condition in step S872. For example, when a predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied from the cumulative number of paid-out balls, the effect control section 210 selects a predetermined effect pattern of the number-of-balls-out notification effect ((E) in FIG. 62). Further, when the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied from the count number of the first big winning opening 30b, the effect control section 210 selects the predetermined effect pattern of the excessive winning notification effect ((F) in FIG. 62). Then, the effect control section 210 sets the selected predetermined effect pattern designation command. The set of commands will be further described later.

When the above procedure is executed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of the big hit.

[Processing on the side of the time management unit (ACT)]
The processing up to this point is executed by the production control unit 210. Various commands set by the production control unit 210 are passed to the time management unit (ACT) 230, and the time management unit 230 Commands are sent to various production devices. Processing executed by the time management unit (ACT) 230 will be described below.

[Production control process during important role]
FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process during the important role. The time management unit 230 controls the performance execution during the small winning game and the big winning game along with time (execution start and end timing) through the execution of the performance control process during the big role. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S880: The time management unit 230 executes effect control execution selection processing. In this process, the time management unit 230 manages the performance execution time from the start of the small winning game (start of opening) to the end of the big winning game (end of ending), and the processes to be executed in this process (steps S882, S884, S886 , S888). For example, when the current time (time schedule) matches the opening start timing, the time management unit 230 selects the opening effect execution process (step S882). Further, when the current time coincides with the initial round (1st round) start timing, the time management unit 230 executes the initial round effect execution process (step S884). Alternatively, if the current time coincides with the specific area passing timing, the time management unit 230 executes the specific area passing effect execution process (step S886), and the current time coincides with the ending start timing. If so, the time management unit 230 executes ending effect execution processing (step S888). Also, in each process, the time management unit 230 performs time management regarding the timing of effect execution (command transmission).

Step S882: In this process, the time management unit 230 loads the opening effect pattern designation command stored in the command set area of the RAM 130, and stores it in another execution area, for example. Commands are set in advance by the effect control unit 210 in the command set area. Then, the time management unit 230 sends the opening effect pattern designation command stored in the execution area to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, sound control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable body control unit 226) at the opening start timing. send to. The opening effect pattern designation command corresponds to a command for designating the effect at the start of the opening ((A) in FIG. 61).

The flow of storing the command loaded from the command set area in the execution area and sending the command from there to each individual control unit will be described later using another block diagram (same hereafter).

Step S884: In this process, the time management unit 230 loads the first round production pattern designation command from the command set area of the RAM 130 and stores it in the execution area. Then, the time management unit 230, the first round production pattern designation command stored in the execution area, each individual control unit (display control unit 220, sound control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, at the start timing of the first round (small winning game) It is transmitted to the movable body control section 226). The first round effect pattern specification command corresponds to a command that specifies the V winning promotion effect ((B) in FIG. 61) at the start of the small winning.

Step S886: In this process, the time management unit 230 loads the post-specific area effect pattern designation command from the command set area of the RAM 130 and stores it in the execution area. Then, the time management unit 230 sends the effect pattern designation command after passing through the specific area stored in the execution area to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, sound control unit 222, lamp control unit 224) at the start timing of the jackpot game (2 rounds). , to the movable body control unit 226). The post-specific area passing effect pattern specifying command corresponds to a command specifying a promotion video effect ((C) in FIG. 61) or a movie reproduction effect ((C) in FIG. 63) at the start of the jackpot game.

Step S888: In this process, the time management section 230 loads the ending effect pattern designation command from the command set area of the RAM 130 and stores it in the execution area. Then, the time management unit 230 sends the ending effect pattern designation command stored in the execution area to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, sound control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable object control unit 220) at the ending start timing after the end of the final round. It is transmitted to the control unit 226). The ending effect pattern designation command corresponds to a command for designating the effect at the start of the ending ((D) in FIG. 55).

[Production execution processing after passing through specific area]
FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of effect execution processing after passage through a specific area. The time management unit 230 executes this process in the above-mentioned effect control process during a big role. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S902: The time management section 230 confirms whether or not the command set area of the RAM 130 stores a command for specifying a movie reproduction effect pattern. If the movie reproduction effect pattern designation command is stored (Yes), the time management unit 230 proceeds to step S904. On the other hand, if the movie reproduction effect pattern designation command is not stored (No), the time management unit 230 proceeds to step S910. In this case, the command set area stores a promotional video effect pattern designation command.

[When there is no movie playback effect pattern specification command]
First, the procedure when the promotion video effect pattern designation command is stored (step S902=No) will be described. In this case, the time management unit 230 executes step S910.

Step S910: The time management section 230 confirms whether or not a predetermined effect pattern designation command is set in the command set area of the RAM 130. FIG. In particular, when the predetermined effect pattern designation command is not set (No), the time management unit 230 proceeds to step S916.

[Start of promotional video production]
Step S916: The time management unit 230 executes device-specific command transmission processing. Specifically, the promotion video effect pattern designation command copied from the command set area is transmitted to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, sound control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable body control unit 226). . As a result, the effect operation of the promotion video effect is actually started. Here, too, the effect operation includes display of a movie image by the liquid crystal display 42, sound output from the speakers 54, 55, 56, light emission of various lamps 46 to 52, operation of the movable body 40f, and the like.

After the promotion video effect is started through the above procedure, the effect control unit 210 executes step S910 through determination (No) in step S902.

Step S910: Here, for example, when some predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied during the jackpot game, the effect control section 210 sets a predetermined effect pattern designation command as described above. In this case, the time management unit 230 confirms that the command set area stores the predetermined effect pattern designation command (Yes), and proceeds to step S912.

Step S912: The time management unit 230 checks whether the movie playing flag is OFF. Since the movie playback flag is OFF here (Yes), the time management unit 230 executes step S914.

Step S914: The time management section 230 generates a command for executing a predetermined effect.
Step S916: Then, the time management unit 230 executes device-specific command transmission processing. In this process, the time management unit 230 transmits a predetermined effect pattern designation command to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, sound control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable body control unit 226). As a result, the predetermined effect (the effect of notifying the number of balls put out, the effect of notifying the excess prize winning) is executed (predetermined effect executing means).

[When movie playback effect pattern specification command is stored]
The above is the procedure when the promotion video effect is executed after passing through the specific area, but the procedure when the movie reproduction effect is executed is as follows.

Step S902: When the time management unit 230 confirms that the command set area stores a command for specifying a movie reproduction effect pattern (Yes), the process proceeds to step S904.

Step S904: The time management unit 230 confirms whether the movie reproduction effect is already being executed. If the movie reproduction effect has not yet been executed (No), the time management unit 230 executes step S906. On the other hand, if the movie reproduction effect is being executed (Yes), the time management section 230 executes step S920.

[Before executing the movie playback effect]
If the movie reproduction effect has not yet been executed, the procedure is as follows.
Step S906: The time management unit 230 turns on the movie playing flag.
Step S910: Next, the time management section 230 confirms whether or not a predetermined effect pattern designation command is set in the command set area of the RAM 130. FIG. If the predetermined effect pattern designation command has not been set (No), the time management unit 230 proceeds to step S916.

[Movie playback production starts]
Step S916: The time management unit 230 executes device-specific command transmission processing. Specifically, the movie reproduction effect pattern designation command copied from the command set area is transmitted to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, sound control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable body control unit 226). . As a result, the effect operation of the movie reproduction effect is actually started (specific effect executing means). The effect operation includes display of a movie image by the liquid crystal display 42, sound output from the speakers 54, 55, 56, light emission of various lamps 46 to 52, operation of the movable body 40f, and the like.

[Control using flag during movie playback]
Here, during the movie reproduction effect, the movie reproduction flag is ON as described above. In this state, if the predetermined effect pattern designation command has been set (step S910=Yes), the time management unit 230 proceeds to step S912.

Step S912: The time management unit 230 checks whether the movie playing flag is OFF. Here, since the movie playback flag is ON (No), the time management unit 230 executes step S918.

Step S918: In this case, the time management section 230 discards the predetermined effect pattern designation command. Therefore, in the next step S916, the time management section 230 does not transmit the predetermined effect pattern designation command to each individual control section. As a result, during the movie reproduction effect, the effect operation of the predetermined effect (the effect of notifying the number of balls released, the effect of notifying the excess winning) is suppressed (effect control means).

[Before the end of the movie playback effect]
When the movie reproduction effect pattern designation command is stored (step S902=Yes) and the movie is being reproduced (step S904=Yes), the time management unit 230 executes step S920.

Step S920: The time management unit 230 confirms whether it is time to end the movie reproduction effect. If it is not the end timing yet (No), the time management unit 230 executes the procedure after step S910.
In this case, even if the predetermined effect pattern designation command is set (step S910=Yes), since the movie playing flag is ON (step S912=No), the time management unit 230 designates the predetermined effect pattern in step S918. Abandon the command. Therefore, during the reproduction of the movie, the effect operation of the predetermined effect is continuously suppressed.

[At the end of the movie playback effect]
If the movie reproduction effect pattern designation command is stored (step S902=Yes) and the movie is being reproduced (step S904=Yes), time management unit 230 continues to execute step S920.

Step S920: Here, when it is confirmed that it is time to end the movie reproduction effect (Yes), the time management unit 230 executes step S922.
Step S922: In this case, the time management section 230 turns off the movie playing flag.

Step S924: Then, the time management unit 230 executes promotion video presentation switching processing. In this process, the time management section 230 stores a copy of the promotion video effect pattern designation command in the execution area.
Step S910: If the predetermined effect pattern designation command is not stored (No), the process proceeds to step S916.

Step S916: Then, the time management unit 230 executes device-specific command transmission processing. In this process, the time management section 230 transmits a predetermined effect pattern designation command to each individual control section (display control section 220, sound control section 222, lamp control section 224, movable body control section 226). As a result, the effect during the important role is switched from the movie reproduction effect to the promotion video effect.

After this, since the movie reproduction effect pattern designation command is not stored (step S902=No), the time management unit 230 repeats the procedure from step S910. As a result, during the subsequent jackpot game, the time management unit 230 controls each individual control unit (display control unit 220, sound control unit 222, lamp A command is transmitted to the control unit 224 and the movable body control unit 226) to control execution of a predetermined effect.

[Command flow]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the flow of commands stored in the command set area of the RAM 130. As shown in FIG. In order to facilitate understanding of the invention, FIG. 74 extracts and illustrates only the block elements related to the transfer of commands within the effect control device 124. As shown in FIG. Also, here, an example of the flow of commands corresponding to the execution of the production during the important role will be taken as an example. The flow of commands will be described below in chronological order.

First, the effect control unit 210 determines (1) the effect pattern during the important role, and determines the predetermined effect pattern at appropriate times according to the occurrence of the predetermined condition. Next, the effect control unit 210 stores (2) various commands in the command set area (unsigned) of the RAM 130 . Various commands include an opening production pattern (opening start) specification command for production during a big role, a first round production pattern (V prize promotion (1st round start)) specification command, a promotion video production pattern specification command, a movie playback production pattern specification command, They are an ending effect pattern designation command, a predetermined effect pattern designation command, and the like. In FIG. 74, the storage area for the predetermined effect pattern specifying command is shown separately from other commands, but the area may not be separated.

The time management unit 230 manages the performance execution (command transmission) timing, and checks the command in the (3) command set area in accordance with various performance execution timings. Then, the confirmed command is copied to an execution area (not shown), and the time management unit 230 (ACT) sends various commands at (4) transmission timing to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, audio control unit 222, lamp It is transmitted to the control unit 224 and the movable body control unit 226).

[Movie playback flag management]
In the above specific area passing effect execution processing (FIG. 73), the time management unit 230 sets the movie playback flag, and if it is ON, the predetermined effect pattern designation command sent from the effect control unit 210 (sub main). was configured to be discarded. This means that the flow of commands is stopped on the side of the time management section 230 (ACT), but the configuration may be such that commands are not stored on the side of the effect control section 210 (sub-main). For example, the time management unit 230 updates the movie playback flag to ON/OFF in real time at the timing of the start and end of the movie playback presentation. Then, when an opportunity to designate a predetermined effect occurs in the effect control unit 210 (sub-main side), the ON/OFF state of the flag is monitored by the effect control unit 210, and if it is OFF, a command for specifying a predetermined effect pattern is set. A configuration may be adopted in which the predetermined effect pattern designation command is not stored if it is ON. In this case, a procedure for monitoring ON/OFF of the movie playing flag may be executed in the processing executed by the effect control section 210 .

Each individual control unit is provided with a mailbox, and commands transmitted from the time management unit 230 (ACT) are received in each mailbox. In this embodiment, each individual control unit is configured to check the mailbox each time a timer interrupt occurs. If the mailbox is checked and the command is received, each individual control unit refers to the received command, and based on the contents of the command, (5) gives a specific instruction to the effect device, and the effect device controls the behavior of

More specifically, the display control unit 220 issues specific instructions to the VDP 152 to control the screen display of the liquid crystal display 42 , and the audio control unit 222 issues specific instructions to the audio IC 134 to control the speaker 54 . , 55 and 56, the lamp control unit 224 gives specific instructions to the LED driver 198 to control the light emission of the various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, etc., and the movable body control unit 226 gives specific instructions to the SMC 199 to control the operation of the movable body 40 f and the drum unit 200 . In this way, various commands are passed from the upstream side to the downstream side inside the production control device 124, so that various productions during the important role are constructed according to the passage of time, and production devices (liquid crystal display, (speaker, lamp, movable body) are used to perform the performance action during the big role.

Thus, in the present embodiment, each effect device executes the effect action uniquely associated with the command output by the effect control section 210 . The above example is an example in which the command and the rendering action are associated one-to-one, but the mode of association is not limited to this. A rendering action associated with a combination of a plurality of commands may be executed by each rendering device.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the control of the effect device by each individual control unit is basically performed based on the command output by the effect control unit 210, and no instruction different from the command is given to the effect device. . However, under certain conditions, each individual control unit may issue instructions other than commands.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the following usefulness can be obtained.
(1) When a movie is reproduced as a specific effect during a big win, the effect operation such as the number-of-balls-out notification effect is suppressed.

(2) Originally, when suppressing a predetermined effect, if there are multiple types of movie playback effects and the playback time (playback scale) differs for each type, a predetermined timing is uniformly determined for all the effect patterns. It is difficult to apply control that prevents production from occurring. For example, even if it is uniformly determined that "predetermined effects are prohibited for 120 seconds from the start of all movie reproduction effects", the actual movie reproduction time differs for each effect pattern, so that a certain effect pattern is played even after 120 seconds. Although it is in the middle, it is possible that the reproduction ends in 60 seconds in another effect pattern. In this case, if a uniform prohibition time is set, there is a problem that the predetermined effect occurs during movie playback, or conversely, the predetermined effect does not occur even though the movie playback has already ended. .
In this regard, in the present embodiment, a dedicated flag (movie playback flag) is set in the table of the time management unit 230 (ACT) at the start of movie playback, and the flag is updated to OFF in real time at the end of movie playback. Therefore, it is possible to perform dynamic and reliable control such as suppressing the ball number notification effect when the flag is ON, and executing the ball ball number notification effect etc. when the flag is OFF. can be suppressed.

The present invention can be modified in various ways without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of presentation given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of presentation described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control unit 210 stores the command in the command set area, the time management unit 230 copies this command to the execution area, and each individual control unit (display control unit 220, voice command) at a predetermined timing. Although the command is transmitted to the control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, and the movable body control unit 226), the mode of transmission of the command is not limited to this. For example, without storing the command output by the effect control unit 210, the individual control units (display control unit 220, sound control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable body control unit 226) configuration to transmit to may be Alternatively, each individual control unit may directly refer to the command stored in the execution area without transmitting the command by the time management unit 230 .

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called 1-type and 2-type mixed machine has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called 1-type gaming machine (a gaming machine that does not have a specific area).
In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine with a probability variation function. It can also be applied to a game machine of ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit to the number of probability variations).
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a variable probability region, and can also be applied to a gaming machine having no variable probability region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not adopt "simultaneous spinning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that employs simultaneous spinning. .

In the above-described embodiment, an example of a game machine including the drum unit 200 has been described, but a game machine without the drum unit 200 may be used.
Further, the drum unit 200 may be changed to a 7-segment display (for example, a device having a plurality of 7-segment displays, a 7-segment display for displaying production patterns) or a liquid crystal display.

The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and can be appropriately modified. Also, the structure, board configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1, including those shown in the drawings, are preferred examples, and it goes without saying that these can be modified as appropriate.

FIG. 75 is a front view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. Also, FIG. 76 is a rear view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. In addition, in the following description, basically, the same description as in the above-described embodiment is omitted, but some parts are redundantly described. Further, with respect to the reference numerals in the drawings, some portions are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the above-described embodiment, and other portions are provided with different reference numerals. A major difference between the above-described embodiment and other embodiments is that a decoration unit having a different shape is attached to the upper front portion of the pachinko machine of other embodiments. Note that the above-described embodiment and other embodiments can be combined. A pachinko machine according to another embodiment will be described below.

The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. can be converted into a game value based on the number of The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

Here, in this specification, the left side as viewed from the player seated facing the pachinko machine 1 is defined as left, the right side as viewed from the player is defined as right, and the upper side as viewed from the player is defined as up. The lower side viewed from the player is referred to as the bottom, the near side viewed from the player is referred to as the front, and the far side viewed from the player is referred to as the rear.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. When the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side disables the opening of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the lock. .

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (game area where game balls flow down, board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface to allow the game balls to flow down.

[Structure of ball plate]
The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. In the lower tray 6c, the game balls put out while the upper tray 6b is full are stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game balls borrowed by the player are received from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6c) is paid out.

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation unit 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit is displayed on this frequency display section. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. Although the example of the model connected to the card unit is described in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. In addition, the player can drop and discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by pushing the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e backward. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . A player can operate the shooting control board set 174 by operating the handle unit 16 to shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmills. The configuration inside the game area 8a will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper side of the tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 each incorporate a glass frame upper speaker 54, and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 each incorporate a glass frame speaker 55. is built in. On the other hand, an inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and an outer frame speaker 56 is installed in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, and 58 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

[Operation member]
An operation unit 60 (operating means) is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 so as to protrude from the upper tray 6b toward the upper front side. The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in its center and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64 . The operation unit 60 is capable of receiving operations in various scenes shown on the production. The player pulls the handle lever 62 toward the front side in one scene of the performance, and pushes the push button 64 in another scene. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbols are changing, the big win is being confirmed, or the big win is being displayed. During the game, it is possible to generate some kind of effects (announcement effects, variable probability promotion effects, promotion effects during big roles, etc.).

A ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64 . Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped part 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pull-in operation of the handle lever 62. As shown in FIG. In addition, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells that are separated at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These cells cannot be operated by the player, but they are effectively used to inform the player of the operation method.

When the player is requested to perform some kind of operation, a reduced image representing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . At this time, each cell of the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if it were a lamp, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (effective operation time). be. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. When the remaining time runs out, all the cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on/off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced image displayed on the screen. By switching the lighting/lighting out of the portion 65 in this manner, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is structured so as to protrude greatly upward when a predetermined trigger occurs during the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it protrudes to a height approximately three times higher than normal. Push button 64 has a light source therein. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or in multiple colors, but when it is protruding, it can emit more colorful light to exhibit a strong presence. Such an operation of the push button 64 makes it possible for the player to recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

Although the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60 in this embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Moreover, these operation members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a directional key 66 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation section 14 . The direction key 66 is composed of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions arranged in a cross shape, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the effect.

[Decoration unit]
A decoration unit 800 is attached to the front upper portion of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁The decoration unit 800 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined attachment member (mechanical mechanism such as screws and hooks). Note that the decoration unit 800 may be one that cannot be removed from the pachinko machine 1 .
The decoration unit 800 (decoration) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light. The decoration unit 800 is a cubic member on which predetermined character information is displayed. luminous.

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 76, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, a payout control board unit 176, and a back cover. A unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main control device, and the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main controller in a visible manner in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and has four 7-segment LEDs. Four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED consists of 7 segments that can display decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located on the lower right of the 7 segments. It is Performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering main control board unit 170 .

The main controller is also provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing the RAM, that is, for initializing the RAM (RWM) provided in the main controller, and in this embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required to change or refer to the game setting of the pachinko machine 1 .

The RAM clear switch 304 is depressible through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 . Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state in which the key cylinder passes through the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

The positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the keyhole 306 for setting keys are merely examples, and can be arranged at arbitrary positions. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be arranged outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). , can store game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown). The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, hall computer, etc.). and various external information signals representing maintenance status etc. .

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

FIG. 77 is a front view showing a single game board unit 8 of another embodiment. The game board unit 8 has a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin board, and when the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a substantially circular launch rail (no reference numeral). The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part centering on the production unit 40. - 特許庁The left part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area L) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right part of the game area 8a is the special game state (jackpot game state, small winning game state, low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state, etc.) is the second game area (right hitting area R, specific area) used in. The left portion of the game area 8a is also used in the high-probability non-time reduction state (advantageous game state). In addition, in the game area 8a, around the production unit 40, there are a middle starting winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Among them, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31 and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning port 26 , and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 . Furthermore, the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the single normal winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged at the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. there is

A game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters a middle starting prize winning port 26 and normal winning prize ports 22 and 24 in the process of flowing down, passes through a starting gate 20, and is a variable starting prize winning device at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter mainly the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the starting gate 20, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation. There is a possibility that the ball will enter, the ball will enter the second variable prize winning device 31 during the opening operation, or the ball will enter the normal prize winning opening 24. - 特許庁The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but there are a middle starting winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning opening. A game ball entered into the device 31 is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a game board (a plywood material, a transparent board, etc. that constitute the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the left side area (left-handed hitting) in the game area 8a It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "left hit") in the area).

On the other hand, when the game ball is entered into the variable start-up winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning opening 24, the area of the right side of the game area 8a (right-handed area ) (executing the so-called “right-handed hitting”).

In this embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, the right start It is possible to enter the ball into the winning hole 28a (predetermined ball entry hole) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start-up winning device 28 is provided with a tongue-type opening/closing member 28b. In the illustrated state, the opening/closing member 28b is in a position (retreat position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right start winning hole 28a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 28b moves to the position (driving position) where the opening/closing member 28b protrudes forward from the board surface, the opening/closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right It becomes possible or easier for the ball to enter the start winning opening 28a). The variable start-up winning device 28 may be a device that opens the right start-up prize opening by displacing the opening/closing member so as to fall forward with its lower edge portion as a hinge.

The first variable winning device 30, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win or a small win), a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big win game) 5th round or 7th round to 10th round condition, condition that the small winning game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning hole 30b. (special electric accessory, first special entry event generating means).

The first variable prize winning device 30 is a device (upper attacker) arranged below the variable starting prize winning device 28, and has, for example, one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the drawing, the opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, the first big prize winning port 30b cannot be won (the first big prize winning port 30b is closed). be. When the first variable prize winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall to the right side with its lower edge portion as a hinge, thereby opening the first big prize winning port 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not disabled, and an event of winning into the first big winning hole 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big winning hole 30b. A game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30b passes through the first count switch 84 and is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a recovery passage (no reference numeral) after the winning is detected.

The second variable winning device 31, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode), is a predetermined second condition (for example, the sixth round of the jackpot game). condition) is satisfied, and allows the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b (specific winning hole) (special electric accessory, second special winning ball event generating means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device (lower attacker) arranged below the first variable winning device 30, and has, for example, one opening/closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is of a type in which the opening/closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player side. is impossible or difficult (the second big winning hole 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the second big prize winning port 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible (possible or easy), and can generate the event of the ball entering the second big winning hole 31b.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guiding passage 31c for guiding a game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guiding path 31c extends leftward and downward from the second big prize winning opening 31b and branches into two at the tip.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a variable probability region blade member 31d and a variable probability region hole 31e are arranged on the lower right side of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge area) is arranged on the lower left side of 31c.

A game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is first detected by the second count switch 85 as entering. Here, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variable region blade member 31d moves to a position (open position) retracted further from the board surface, and the game ball is guided to the probability variable area hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is OFF, the probability variable region blade member 31d moves to a position (closed position) protruded to the front side from the board surface, so that the game The ball passes through the upper portion of the blade member 31d for the variable probability region and is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probable variable area (specific area)]
Further, a variable probability region (no reference numeral) is provided inside the variable probability region hole 31e. The variable probability area is an area through which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and the blade member 31d for the variable probability region operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state. If it is, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

There is a possibility that the variable probability area blade member 31d will operate during the big hit game. The operation pattern of the variable probability region blade member 31d opens the variable probability region for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closes the variable probability region for a long period of time after closing it for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds). Apply either a long open pattern that opens long (for example, about 20 seconds) or a short open pattern that only opens the probability variable area for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the start of the round. . Which operation pattern to operate the variable probability area blade member 31d can be selected according to the winning pattern. Specifically, a long open pattern for long opening the probability variable area is selected when the probability variable pattern is won, and a short open pattern for short opening the probability variable area is selected when the normal pattern is won.

In addition, the operation pattern of the probability variable region blade member 31d applies only the pattern in which the probability variable region blade member 31d opens long, and when the first variable winning device 30 opens short and the round ends, the probability variable region It is also possible to eliminate the opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time. In addition, since the game ball does not reach the variable probability region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult for the game ball to be guided to the probability variable region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state is shifted from the low probability state to the high probability state after the big win game ends. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (high-probability time-reduction state). On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state shifts to a low probability state after the big win game is over. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (low-probability time-reduction state).

A performance unit 40 is installed on the game board unit 8 from its central position to its right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the direction of flow of the game ball, and has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, built-in light emitters (LEDs, etc.). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the production unit 40, and various production images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including production patterns corresponding to special patterns. . Thus, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. - 特許庁Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorations (including movable bodies and light-emitting bodies) are arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) can add decorativeness. A ring-shaped logo LED unit 900 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display 42 .

In addition, inside the production unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f for production (for example, an ornament imitating the shape of a spade). The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. The effect using these movable bodies 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e easily flows into the medium start winning opening 26 directly below. . At the entrance of the ball guide passage 40d, a blade member that is always movable by a solenoid (not shown) is arranged. A device for sorting whether to induce or not) may be arranged.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not enter (win a prize) in various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32.例文帳に追加In addition, including the game ball entering the normal winning openings 22, 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, is driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls that are caught are recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

[Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail]
78 is a schematic diagram showing a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 75. FIG. FIG. 78 shows a cross section taken along a plane parallel to the vertical direction and the front-rear direction passing through the upper end of the game area 8a (the top, the upper end of the outer peripheral surface 502 (outer rail)). The cross section shown in FIG. 78 also passes through the upper end (top) of the inner peripheral surface 504 (inner rail) and the upper end (top) of the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 (design member).

The rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located below the upper end of the game area 8a in the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a (the front portion of the upper end of the game area 8a). That is, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located below the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500. As shown in FIG. Also, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located above the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500. As shown in FIG. In addition, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is positioned above the lower end of the game ball X (the game ball in contact with the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a. is doing. More specifically, it is located above the center of the game ball X in this state (the position indicated by the dashed line Y in FIG. 78).

In addition, the protruding portion 856 protrudes downward from the center of the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a. That is, the lower end of the projecting portion 856 is located below the center of the game ball X in this state. More specifically, the lower end of the projecting portion 856 is located below the lower end of the game ball X in this state. Also, the protruding portion 856 protrudes downward from the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500 .

As is clear from the above, the decoration unit 800 overlaps the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , to cover the entire game ball X in that state. In addition, in the decoration unit 800, the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a at the rear end of the lower surface 852 (the front portion of the upper end of the game area 8a) extends in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , at least the lower half of the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a is not overlapped, and at least the lower half of the game ball in this state is not covered. A rear portion of the lower surface 852 is an inclined surface 854 . Therefore, even when the game ball is positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a, the player can easily visually recognize the game ball rolling in the game area 8a. Here, it is preferable that at least the lower half of the game ball in this state can be seen from a predetermined position, specifically from the player's eye point, without the player moving his or her face up, down, left, or right. A player's eye point means the position of the player's eyes when playing a game while sitting on a chair. Specifically, for example, when the distance between the glass unit G and the player's eyes in the front-rear direction is less than 50 to 90 cm, at least a portion of the game ball in this state is maintained without the player moving his or her face up, down, left, or right. (Lower half) should be visible. That is, the decoration unit 800 is arranged on a straight line from a predetermined point at a distance of less than 50 to 90 cm from the glass unit G to the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a (the part below the center of the game ball X). It should be designed so that it does not get wet.

The following features can be derived from the configuration of FIG. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) Equipped with a front frame (integrated door unit 4) having a design part (top lens part, decorative unit 800) on the upper part and an inner frame (inner frame assembly 7) having a game board (game board unit 8). It is a game machine that has
(2) A game area 8a is formed on the game board.
(3) Above the game area 8a, there is a guide passage 500 that guides the game ball to the right hitting area.
(4) The guide passage 500 has an outer peripheral surface (an outer peripheral surface 502, the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) and an inner peripheral surface (an inner peripheral surface 504, the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500).
(5) Among the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as the first reference line L1.
(6) Among the vertical lines intersecting the first reference line L1 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the first reference line L1 intersects the design part), the design The rearmost part of the lower surface of the part is defined as a first design part D1.
(7) Among the vertical lines intersecting the first reference line L1 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the first reference line L1 intersects the design part), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the part is defined as a second design part D2.
(8) The first design portion D1 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension A) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm). The game ball has a diameter of about 11 mm.
(9) The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm).
The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so the design portion can be enlarged. can.
In addition, even though the design part is enlarged in this way, by setting the distance between the first reference line L1 and the first design part D1 to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball is hit strongly (the game ball passage ), visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

(10) Of the lines extending perpendicular to the game board surface, the portion located directly below the top of the outer peripheral surface on the inner peripheral surface (the portion on the right side of point B, the portion on the left side of point B, the portion that will be point B ) is defined as a second reference line L2.
(11) Among the vertical lines intersecting the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the second reference line L2 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersects the design part), the design The rearmost part of the lower surface of the part is defined as a first design part D1.
(12) Among the vertical lines intersecting the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the second reference line L2 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersects the design part), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the part is defined as a second design part D2.
(13) The first design portion D1 is located above the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension C) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm).
(14) The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm).
The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so the design portion can be enlarged. can. In addition, even though the design portion is enlarged in this way, by setting the distance between the second reference line L2 and the first design portion D1 to be equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is weakly launched (the game ball path When the game ball rolls along the bottom surface of the), visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the game board surface can be ensured by the structure. Further, by combining such a configuration with the above-described embodiment, the visibility of the game board surface can be ensured by the structure and light emission control.

[Arrangement of positioning holes for outer rail]
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an outer rail. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a game board, an outer rail and a rail base. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing how a game ball contacts the outer rail. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outer rail and a game board.
As shown in FIG. 79, the outer rail 600 is a bendable thin plate-shaped horizontally long member. The outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 (holes) for guiding the mounting position to the game board (rail base 700). Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of holes 602 that are used when the outer rail 600 is machined. Hole 602 is smaller in size than guide 601 .

A distance Wc from the center of the predetermined guide portion 601 (hole) to the end of the outer rail 600 (lower end in the drawing) is set to 2.7 mm. In other words, the predetermined guide portion 601 is arranged at a position where a game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit it. More specifically, all the predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at positions where game balls rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 do not hit.

As shown in FIG. 80, a rail base 700 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, and a curved outer rail 600 is arranged on a curved guide surface 702 inside the rail base 700. As shown in FIG. A plurality of projecting portions 701 are formed on the guide surface 702 at positions corresponding to the predetermined guide portions 601 .

As shown in FIG. 81 , the outer rail 600 is arranged on the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 . The projecting portion 701 of the rail base 700 is inserted into the predetermined guide portion 601 of the outer rail 600 , thereby positioning the outer rail 600 on the rail base 700 . Here, the projecting portion 701 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball X. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 82, the outer rail 600 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, and passes from the starting end (PS) of the lower left outer rail 600 through the left end (PL) of the left outer rail 600 to the upper It is curved to pass through the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 and reach the end (PE) of the upper right outer rail 600 .

The following features can be derived from the configuration shown in these figures. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 8, game board 8b, rail base 700) forming a game area and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board.
(2) The outer rail 600 has predetermined guide portions 601 (many holes for inserting the protrusions 701, holes for attaching positioning pins, cutouts for fitting the protrusions 701) for guiding the mounting position to the game board. are formed. Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with holes 602 that are used when the outer rail 600 is machined.
(3) In a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the starting end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the first range (H1), and the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 to the upper end (PU) is defined as a second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a third range (H3).
(4) The number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater in the first range (H1) (eg, 3) than in the second range (H2) (eg, 2), and is larger than the third range (H3) (for example, 0).

As a result, a large number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the side of the ball launching device, which receives a large impact from the game ball and requires particularly accurate placement of the outer rail 600, and the deviation of the outer rail 600 on the side of the ball launching device is prevented. and vibration can be reliably prevented.
In addition, a small number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the end side of the outer rail 600, which receives less impact from the game ball and has less influence on the game, so that the outer rail 600 can be easily processed and attached to the rail base 700. can do.

(5) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the second range (H2) in the first range (H1), and the third number in the second range (H2). range (H3) or more.
(6) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the third range (H3) in the first range (H1), and the third range (H2) in the second range (H2). range (H3) or more.
(7) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the second range (H2) in the first range (H1), range (H3) or more.
(8) Predetermined guide portions 601 are not formed at the upper vertex (PU) and left vertex (PL) of the outer rail 600 .

(9) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed in the third range (H3).
(10) The predetermined guide portion 601 is formed at a position where the game ball does not come into contact (for example, a position away from the trajectory where the game ball contacts).
(11) The outer rail 600 is supported along the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700, and the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 is inclined so that the game ball is less likely to flow forward.
(12) The predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at uneven intervals.

(13) In place of the above (3) and (4), the range from the starting end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the fourth range (H4 ), and the range from the left end (PL) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a fifth range (H5). number) is larger than the fifth range (H5) (eg, two).
(14) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in the state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is set to the sixth range (H6 ), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a seventh range (H7), the predetermined number of guide portions 601 is within the sixth range (H6) (for example, five ) is larger than the seventh range (H7) (for example, 0).
(15) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in the state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the middle (PM) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the eighth range (H8 ), and the range from the middle (PM) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is a ninth range (H9), the predetermined number of guide portions 601 is the eighth range (H8) (for example, 4 number) is larger than the ninth range (H9) (eg, one number).
By adopting such a configuration, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized, and the game can be played according to the design value.

1 pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 20 starting gate 28 variable starting winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol working memory lamp 34 first special symbol display device 35 second special symbol display device 34a first special symbol working memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROMs
76 RAM
124 effect control device 126 effect control CPU
130 RAM
180 control ROM
220 production control unit 230 time management unit (ACT)

Claims (1)

a front frame on which a design portion is formed;
a game board on which a game area having a left-handed area and a right-handed area is formed;
a guide passage disposed above the game area, having an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface, and guiding a game ball to the right-handed area;
a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in response to the occurrence of a predetermined condition;
Along with switching the state of a predetermined flag in response to a predetermined trigger, an effect control means capable of suppressing the effect operation of the predetermined effect,
Among the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board, a line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as a first reference line,
Among the portions where the vertical line with respect to the first reference line can intersect, the rearmost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is the first design portion,
Among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line intersect, if the lowermost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is the second design portion,
The first design portion is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball,
The gaming machine, wherein the second design portion is positioned below the first reference line and is at a distance from the first reference line equal to or greater than the diameter of a game ball.

Images